Lutze Switch Power

Automation Solutions
LÜTZE
Machine and System
Automation Technology
DC Power Supply
DC Current Control
Relay and Solid State Relay
Signal Isolation Converters
Switches
Function Modules
From products to solutions!
Installation • Cabinet • Automation • OEM • Transportation
Welcome to LÜTZE
Installation Solutions
We have been developing and manufacturing electro-

nic and electrical engineering solutions for controls
and installations for more than 45 years.
Our basic concept as system suppliers, providing a

comprehensive and well-matched product range with
which we can generate innovative and customized
Cabinet Solutions solutions for our customers, has stood the test of time.
The close relationship between product development

and customer requirements allows Lutze continuously
to improve and develop our products for the various
markets.
Lutze systems comply with the highest industrial stan-

dards; Lutze solutions mean improvement and innova-
Automation Solutions tion.
Our four product groups include components and

concepts suitable for almost any control applicati-
on. For more information on our products, please
visit www.luetze.com.
OEM Solutions
Transportation Solutions
Take a look at LUTZE,

take a look at the new
LÜTZEOnline Catalogue:
www.luetze.com/catalogue
Business Management:
Sustainable and forwa
The future is blue

Sustainable enterprise means thin- duct policy - and from now in the
king and planning ahead, under- SkyBLUE campaign.
standing and embedding the belief
that long lasting success is more We manufacture our products in a
important than short-term profit resourceful and energy-conscious
maximisation. manner. We use long lasting,
environmentally-friendly materials.
This is an attitude that has existed And our products, in turn, help
within LÜTZE for quite some time. our customers save energy and
Economic and environmental resources.
responsibilities complement each Good for everyone: for us, for the
other well and are reflected in the environment, for our customers a
sustainable management and pro- win-win-win situation.
:
ward-looking
„The competitiveness of our industry and of its suppliers depends quite sub-
stantially on how we succeed in developing practical results. The results that
we produce together today, are our competitive advantages in the future.“
Udo LÜTZE,
Member of the Executive Committee of
the Green Carbody Innovation Alliance
Goods with real value

The value of a product or a solution sustainable technologies and indu-
from LÜTZE is determined by its stries. Thus, LÜTZE provides ans-
sustainable qualities as well. Every wers and shows ways to handle
innovation is only as successful in resources responsibly, with our
the future if it has a long-term positi- environment and finally our future.
ve effect. Therefore, we provide, for
example, non-ageing components
and those with extremely high effi-
ciency. We are incorporating the
necessary knowledge and manu-
facturing head start in numerous
joint projects with the objective of
improving energy efficiency and
Table of contents
Chapter 1: Interface Technology Switchgear 1.0

Basics from 1.1
Accessories from 1.21
Relay Modules Microplug from 1.27
Relay and Solid State Relay Modules Microcompact
Relay and Solid State Relay Modules Microcompact, pluggable from 1.34
Relay and Solid State Relay Modules Minicompact from 1.62
Relay and Solid State Relay Modules Variocompact from 1.72
Chapter 2: Signal Isolation Converters 2.0

Basics from 2.1
Open Technology FDT from 2.7
Microcompact Signal Converters from 2.10
Special Signal Converters from 2.12
Analogue Standard Signal Converters from 2.15
Special Signal Converters, Monitoring Modules from 2.19
Temperature Converters for PT 100 from 2.21
Temperature Converters for Thermocouples from 2.26
Analogue Standard Signal Converters from 2.30
Freely Programmable Temperature Converters from 2.40
Chapter 3: Supply and Safety 3.0

Basics from 3.1
Power Supplies DELTA, Regulated from 3.11
Power Supplies COMPACT, Regulated from 3.31
Current Control System LOCC-Box from 3.48
Current Control System LOCC-Box, programmable from 3.55
Current Control System LOCC-Box, Accessories from 3.59
Fuse Modules from 3.65
Constant Voltage Source from 3.66
Technical Information
For technical information
on downloading visit All contracts and orders are subject to our general terms and conditions of business and our conditions of
www.luetze.com! supply and payment. You will find them on our website at www.luetze.com.
Chapter 4: Ethernet Connectivity 4.0
Basics from 4.1
Ethernet Switches from 4.10
LÜTZE Ethernet Cables · Overview from 4.20
Actuator Sensor Interface Patch Cables from 4.24
Actuator Sensor Interface Industrial Connectors RJ45 from 4.29
Actuator Sensor Interface Module Racks RJ45 from 4.31
Actuator Sensor Panel Connectors and Wall Ducts from 4.33
LÜTZE Ethernet Connectivity · Glossary
Chapter 5: Function Modules 5.0

Mounting Modules from 5.4
Potentiometer Components from 5.5
Diode Modules from 5.6
Diodes from 5.7
Lamp Test Modules from 5.8
Miscellaneous
List of Article Numbers from 6.0
Certificates
Take a look at LUTZE,

take a look at the new
LÜTZEOnline Catalogue:
www.luetze.com/catalogue
From Product to Soluti o
LÜTZE Solutions for I n
Company Philosophy
The company’s autonomy is an inte- Automation applies technological
gral part of the business philosophy. advancements which assist us on
LÜTZE is a solutions provider that a daily basis to solve automation
focuses on customer benefits which tasks more quickly, safely and
is why the main importance is on efficiently. LÜTZE offers a wide
in-house expertise and know-how. range of products and solutions
The continual development and that are deployed by many
implementation of innovative product prestigious customers.
ideas and solutions is part of the daily
activity of the construction planning
and development departments at
LÜTZE.
i on:
I ndustrial Automation
For more than 50 years, Friedrich Lütze GmbH has been active in automation
technology. This high-tech company has been developing and producing electro-
nic and electro-mechanical components and solutions for the automation industry.
The innovations and expertise of LÜTZE are applied in control cabinets as well as
in machine or system installations.
LÜTZE know-how at a glance

• 32-bit processors from Netx or Pentium class
• Security level SIL 1 to SIL 3
• Full casting of electronic devices
• Working temperatures of -40 °C to +85 °C
• Field bus technology in CANopen, Ethernet IP, ProfiNet
• IEC 61131-based control software
• Parameterisation via FDT/DTM
• Aluminium and plastic housings for extended working temperatures
• Cable technology for field bus and network technology, motion and C-track cables
• Installation systems for space-saving use in industrial environments
• UL, Class I, Div2, GL, CCC approved
Power supply - the hea r
Energy-efficient and space-saving

LÜTZE offers the entire spectrum The spectrum covers the power
of standard and uninterruptible range of between 10 W to 960 W
power supplies. and output voltages of DC 5 V to
DC 72 V.
By deploying the latest digital tech-
nology, the devices deliver up to
>94 % effectiveness, extremely
compact sizes, power boost and a
patented charging technique for
uninterruptible power supplies that
can double a battery’s service life.
a rt of the system
Power supplies are at the heart of every application. Unsuitable devices can
result in system breakdown and enormous subsequent costs. Power supply units
must offer maximum efficiency and compact sizes and a constant uninterruptible
power supply in safe areas.
LÜTZE
LÜTZE power suppli
supplies
es LÜTZE UPS
LÜTZE
DC device protection b e
Intelligent and reliable monitoring of DC 24V circuits

The reliable power supply needs to The LÜTZE LOCC box system used • Settings can be sealed
optimally connect capacitive loads, for monitoring the current meets • Status indicator: operation, error
quickly detect a power surge during these demands like no other system and 90 % load
operation and only disconnect the and is combined with other intelligent • Adjustable properties
affected path. functions: • “Power-ON” effect to switch on
• Class of flammability according to capacitive loads
This type of system must save the UL 94-V0 • Save last system status
error in order to prevent risks when the • Temperature-independent response • 8.1 mm modul width
system is switched on again and to time
diagnose the error using hardware or • Uninterruptible supply via copper bar
via a field bus interface. and contact slide
b efore the fuse is triggered
The benefits of a reliable power supply only come into effect if a suitable safety
concept has been developed that meets the selective switch-off requirements
with high cable attenuation and integration into the existing communication level.
• Remote ON/OFF and manual ON/OFF

• Individual and centralised error signalling
• Adjustable rated current up to DC10 A
• Gateways to master field bus
systems such as CANopen and ProfiNet
• Free monitoring software
for network analysis
Connecting, converting a
Connecting, converting, monitoring

Relay, solid state relay Analogue signal processing The electronics integrated into the
LÜTZE offers products for a wide The 6.2 mm wide devices ensure devices enable operation at 3,000 m
range of applications especially for extremely accurate processing for above sea level without requiring
coupling signals and for switching this industry. Whether used for con- any modifications (such as with wind
loads of up to 250 V/16 A at tempera- verting signals or recording tempera- turbines)
tures ranging from -40 °C to +75 °C. tures or limit values, the LÜTZE
The micro-compact devices with an signal transformers complete a wide
extremely compact width of 6.2 mm range of tasks. Thanks to the use of
are used for narrow applications. hybrid technology, the power loss
Devices are also available with remains minimal so that they can
spring-loaded connections for areas operate at temperatures between -40
exposed to strong vibrations. °C and + 75 °C.
g and monitoring
Monitoring: power, voltage and temperatures are the parameters that require moni-
toring. In the wind power industry, for example, the battery voltage is monitored with
a voltage monitoring unit. A current monitoring unit is connected in series with high-
current transformers in aluminium production or in low-voltage distributors.
Temperature monitoring is used to monitor the control cabinet temperature for wind
power or as a two-point controller in cold storage warehouses. The applications are
extremely diverse.
For monitoring applications, LÜTZE

can also offer 6.2 mm wide devi-
ces that have two independent
switch outputs.
The monitoring function covers
the normal threshold function,
hysteresis as well as monitoring
tendencies. If required, all functi-
ons in one unit or that can be
parameterised via FDT/DTM.
Structured networks -E t
Plug & Play in Industrial Ethernet

Save time, costs and stress: LÜTZE MDI/MDI-X functionality uncrossed • Conforms to IEEE 802.3 and 802.3u
can cost-efficiently and quickly solve cables can also be used between • Broadcast storm protection
your assembly requirements. the switch and end device. Because • Auto negotiation, Auto Crossing,
industrial areas are synonymous Auto Polarity
LÜTZE ET Series - Reliable trans- with harsh environments, all of our • Redundant infeed
mission even with Giga power systems feature aluminium hou- • Wide range supply
The LÜTZE ET Series of switches sings, expanded temperature ranges • Full / half duplex data flow
and media converters enable you to from -40 °C / +75 °C and fibre-optic monitoring
set up a Plug & Play network infra- transmission.. • PoE variants
structure in industrial environments - Additional features include:
without any configuration necessary. • Transfer rates of up to 1 Gbit/s
E thernet connectivity
LÜTZE provides category 6

Category
Category 5 c cables
ables are gene- and 7 shielded pair cables with
rally
rally a
available
vailable at LÜTZE with an additional all-round braided-
an all
all-round
-round bbraided
raided shield copper shield (S/FTP).
(S/U
(S/UTP).
TP).
Cables – a lot depends on them

The correct transmission of process standard or customised applicati- All connectors facilitate quick and
data is absolutely essential. An ons, C-track or torsion-resistant easy assembly.
important requirement is the correct cables: LÜTZE delivers customised
choice of cables, connection tech- solutions for your applications in Customised Industrial Ethernet:
nology and components. CAT5, CAT6, CAT7, POF or HCS. Besides supplying standard pro-
ducts, LÜTZE can also produce
Procurement, logistics and produc- You can also take advantage of our customised solutions thanks to its
tion all need to be organised per- comprehensive portfolio of connec- years of expertise in Industrial
fectly. The quality of cable must tors, outlets and wall bushings. Ethernet.
comply with the system’s require- The connectors conform to IEC
ments. Whether you are looking for 61076-3-106.
1. Interface Technology - Switching Modules
Interface Technology · Switching Modules
Relays and Solid State Relays

Automation systems are expected to deliver high levels of availability,
electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety. Each new Contents
generation in the control engineering field also imposes higher
demands on the electronic modules used. Product Overview
State-of-the-art relay or solid state relay modules have been reliably
performing this key task at the interface to the controller for many Basics: Relays
years.
Suitable modules meeting the requirements of modern-day plant Basics: Solid State Relays
concepts must incorporate the following features:
Microplug Series
• High interference immunity
Miniature single relays
• Electrical isolation with a high level of insulation between the input
and output circuit and contacts Industrial relays
• Coupling of different signal levels Fully assembled relay modules
• High short-time overload withstand capability
• Easy handling Microcompact Series
The special features of solid state relays allow them to be used in with pluggable relays or solid state relays
meeting the following process requirements: with integrated relays or solid state relays
with integrated relay – positively-driven
• High switching frequencies
• DC switching currents contacts
• Low control power
• Wear- and bounce-free switching Minicompact Series
• Vibration and impact resistance with integrated relays or solid state relays
• Long service life
Varioprint Series
with relays or solid state relays
L-Power Series
Semiconductor contactor, 1-phase
1.1
Interface Technology · Product Overview
Microplug Series
Relay socket Relay socket Accessories Fully assembled Fully assembled

Miniature relays Industrial relays with miniature relays with industrial relays
Solid state relays 1U/2U 2U/4U
Page 1.20 Page 1.20 Page 1.22 Page 1.27 Page 1.31
Microcompact Series
Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays

or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State
Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays
Page 1.37 Page 1.42 Page 1.51 Page 1.55 Page 1.56 Page 1.57
Minicompact Series
Relays Relays Relays Relays

or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State or Solid State
Relays Relays Relays Relays
Page 1.64 Page 1.67 Page 1.68 Page 1.69
Varioprint Series
Relays
Page 1.73
L-Power Series
Semiconductor
contactor
1-phase
1.2
Interface Technology · Product Overview
Microcompact Series
Relays
positively-driven
Contacts
Page 1.59
1.3
Interface Technology · Basics
Relays - Terminology
measured using the voltage drop method Relays are generally measured as from a 12. Contact capacity
set out below. The measurement currents switching current of 1A using the voltage drop
are shown. method at 1A, 6V DC. This value is measured between the terminals
with a measurement current of 1kHz and
20C.
11. Maximum continuous current
The maximum continuous current is the

A Amperemeter V Voltmeter R Potentiometer
current which can be safely carried after the
contacts close or before they open without
Measurement currents causing an impermissible temperature rise in
Nominal contact current Measurement the contacts or other temperature-sensitive
or switching current (A) current (mA) components in the relay (coil, springs,
< 0.01 1 insulation, etc.).
0.01 - 0.1 10 Its value is normally above the maximum
0.1 - 1 100 switching current.
>1 1,000
Relay characteristic data
1. Insulation resistance 3. Surge voltage resistance
The insulation resistance is measured Capacity of the relay to resist an external

between mutually insulated conductive surge voltage, such as a lightning strike or
components of the relay: between open other phenomenon. For test purposes a
contacts and between the coil or contacts characteristic curve is applied in which the
against the magnetic circuit or base body rise time, the peak value and the reset time
with earth potential. This value is normally are defined.
termed "initial insulation resistance", and
may decrease over time due to ageing or
deposits of contact burn-off.
• Between coil and contacts 5. Reset time
• Between open contacts
• Between contact sets Time from the end of excitation until a
• Between exciter coil and reset coil normally-open contact of form B closes again.
(In the case of multi-contact relays it is the
2. Voltage resistance time until the last contact closes again.)
The reset time contains no bounce time.
Voltage which can be connected to the relay
without voltage breakdown for a certain time 4. Set time 6. Contact bounce
is normally measured at the same points as
the insulation resistance. The specified Time from the start of excitation of the coil Contact bounce is given in milliseconds. The
value in Veff is applied for one minute. until the working contact of form A closes. bounce time produces an intermittent contact
(In the case of multi-contact relays it is the release resulting from the collision of the
time until the last contact closes.) The set moving contacts during setting or resetting.
time contains no bounce time.
Mechanical properties and service life
1. Impact resistance six times in each of the three axis directions. in "g" or as displacement with a specific
frequency range. The test was performed for
1) Functional 2. Vibration resistance a total of six hours; two hours for each of the
three axis directions.
Acceleration which the relay resists during 1) Functional
operation without the closed contacts
opening for longer than the specified time Vibration which the relay resists during
(mostly 10 s). operation without closed contacts opening for
longer than the specified time.
2) Destructive 2 3
2) Destructive
Acceleration which the relay is able to
resist during shipping or installation without Vibration which the relay resists during ship- 1
damage and without altering its characteristic ping, installation or use without damage and
data. The impact resistance is given in "g". without altering its characteristic data. The
The test was performed a total of 18 times - vibration resistance is given as acceleration
1.4
3. Mechanical service life 6. Life curve Life curve
Minimum number of operations for which The life curve is given for each relay type in 1000
(x 104)
the relay can be operated under nominal the Data column. The service life (number of
(x 104)
conditions (coil voltage, temperature, operations) is dependent on the switching
humidity, etc.) without placing load on the voltage and switching current.
Lebensdauer
30 V DC ohm
Ohmsche Last load
resistive
contacts. For a DC relay with the following data: 100
lifetime
switching voltage = AC 125 V and switching
4. Electrical service life current = 0.6 A the service life is 300,000
125 V AC ohm resistive
Ohmsche Last load
switching cycles. This value relates to the
Minimum number of operations of the relay ohmic load. Check the momentary load prior 10
under nominal conditions at the specified to use.
contact load.
5. Maximum switching frequency

0
1 2
Highest possible switching frequency at current
Strom (A)(A)
which the mechanical or electrical service
life can be attained under nominal excitation
of the coil.
Methods for selecting the correct relay
Methods for selecting the correct relay
For proper operation of the relay it is essential to know the properties and application conditions of the selected relay in detail in order to match
it to the specified ambient conditions.
The coil and contact properties of the relay used must be precisely matched to the prevailing ambient conditions. The table below summarises
the key points in relay selection.
It can be used as a reference in searching for the repair instructions product under the specified conditions.
Rules Product selection

Coil a) Rating 1) Take into account the ripple of the exciter voltage.
b) Pick-up voltage (current) 2) Take into account the ambient temperature and temperature rise of the coil
c) Drop-out voltage (current) 3) If the relay is operated in conjunction with semiconductors, the associated
d) max. continuous voltage (current) circuit must also be considered. Take care to avoid voltage drops on
e) Coil voltage power-up.
f) Impedance
g) Temperature rise
Contacts a) Contact arrangement 1) It is advisable to use a product containing more contacts than the essential
b) Contact load minimum.
c) Contact material 2) Relays must provide the service life expected in the specific application
d) Service life case at hand.
e) Contact resistance 3) Does the contact material match the load type? This is particularly neces-
sary in relation to minimum values.
4) The service life may be shortened in operation at high temperatures. It
should be tested for the specific environment.
5) Depending on the circuit, the relay actuation may be synchronised by the
alternating current load. As this dramatically reduces the service life, the
application case at hand should be checked.
Switching time a) Switching time

b) Set time
c) Reset time
d) Switching frequency
Mech. a) Vibration resistance 1) Take into account the vibration and impact load at the operating location.
properties b) Impact resistance 2) Particularly at high temperatures, a relay with coil insulation of class B or F
c) Ambient temperature may be required.
d) Service life
Additional a) Voltage resistance 1) For operation in aggressive atmospheres sealed relays should be selected.
aspects b) Mounting method 2) Do special conditions apply?
c) Size
d) Protection types
1.5
Basic rules for use of relays
• Avoid subjecting the relay to shock impact. • In the case of polarised relays, ensure that So you should check all parameters prior
the correct polarity (+/–) is connected to the to use.
• Relay housings should not be removed. coil.
The values might be changed as a result. • Do not operate the relay at temperatures
That is to say, the data sheet specifications • For correct application the nominal voltage above those specified on the data sheet.
apply only to the complete relay. should be applied to the coil. Use square
waves for DC coils and sine waves for • Use flux-tight or sealed washable relays for
• Relays should wherever possible be operat- AC coils. automatic soldering.
ed in an environment of normal temperature
and humidity, with little dust, and free of • The coil voltage should not exceed the • Use alcohol-based cleaning products to
SO2, H2S or organic gases. For operation in permissible maximum. clean the sealed relays. Avoid ultrasound
aggressive atmospheres sealed relays cleaning of all kinds of relays.
should be selected. Silicone residues close • The switching load and service life
to the relay may cause contact failures. specifications are merely guide values. The
(This also applies to plastic-sealed relays.) physical phenomena in switching, and thus
the service life, depend heavily on the type
of load and the other operating conditions.
Precautions at the relay coil input
The applied nominal voltage is key to correct operation of the relay. The relay will work if the applied voltage is above the pick-up voltage, but
it is necessary to apply only the specified nominal voltage to the coil to avoid changes in coil resistance which might occur due to differing
current feed, voltage fluctuations and temperature rise. Care should also be taken because problems such as winding shorts and coil burn-off
can occur when the maximum applied continuous voltage is exceeded. The following section sets out precautions for the coil input. Observe
these instructions in order to avoid problems.
1. Basic rules relating to the relay coil returned to its initial state, the contacts may be If relays are operated at the upper limit of
damaged. AC relays need a higher operating their capacity, fluctuations in the injected coil
• AC relays current than that specified to power-up because current will occur, and the contact movement
the inductance - and thus the impedance - is may be delayed. This poses a risk that the
AC relays are almost always operated on lower when the relay armature is open than specified switching capacities will not be
a voltage source with a frequency of 50 or when the armature is connected. This must be reached. These aspects should be carefully
60 Hz and standard voltages of 6, 12, 24, 48, considered especially when multiple relays are considered. The coil resistance is increased
115, 120, 230 and 240 V. So those standard operated in parallel. by a factor of 0.4%/C both in the event
voltages should be used wherever possible. of internal heat-up and if the ambient
Losses also occur in AC coils due to short • DC relays temperature increases. The setting and
circuit rings, eddy current and hysteresis resetting voltage is increased by the same
losses. Furthermore, the coil efficiency is To operate DC relays there are standard factor. (For some polarised relays this rate of
reduced, resulting in greater coil heat-up than voltages: DC 5, 6, 12, 24,48 and 100 V. change is much less however.)
in the case of DC relays. Also, relays start to The catalogue specifies the setting current.
hum even at voltages below the minimum That current is just about enough, however,
operating voltages. It must be ensured that to move the relay armature. Taking into account
the output voltage from the voltage source resistance tolerances and increased coil
does not fluctuate excessively. Voltage resistance due to temperature, between 1.5
drops may occur when actuating a motor for and 2 times the value of the setting voltage
example. If a relay hums, and as a result is should be selected as the operating voltage.
2. Maximum continuous voltage and rise voltage greater than the permitted maximum Duty cycle %
in coil temperature may result in excessive coil heating, leading
Continuous operation 100 % coil heat-up
to winding short and ultimately causing burn-
In correct application, the relays must be off of the coil. ON : OFF = 3 : 1 approx. 80 %
operated at nominal voltage. Note that a coil ON : OFF = 1 : 1 approx. 50 %
voltage greater than the permitted maximum • Temperature rise in pulsed operation ON : OFF = 1 : 3 approx. 35 %
may result in excessive coil heating, leading
to winding short and ultimately causing In the case of voltage pulses shorter than
burn-off of the coil. Do not operate the relay 2 minutes, the coil heat-up depends not only
at temperatures above those specified on the on the time but also on the duty cycle. It is
data sheet. relatively low compared to the heat-up in
continuous operation. The various relays
• Maximum continuous voltage are essentially identical in this respect.
In correct application, the relays must be

operated at nominal voltage. Note that a coil
1.6
• Change in pick-up voltage due to rise in higher ambient temperature. The ratio rises in line with the insulation resistance. For
coil temperature (warm start) between the increases in resistance and some polarised relays that rate of change is
temperature for copper wire is approximately much lower however.
After a certain constant voltage in the coil 0.4% per 1C. The coil resistance is increased
followed by switching the current off and by that ratio.
back on, the pick-up voltage of DC relays For operation of the relay it is therefore nec-
increases slightly in line with the temperature essary for the voltage to be higher than the
rise. This is comparable to operation in a pick-up voltage, and that the pick-up voltage
3. Applied coil voltage and switching time is 9 to 18 ms.The set time for large coils is close to rated load) may result in reduced
too fast in DC operation too. However, an service life and minor fusing.
In AC operation the set time is heavily excessively fast operating time will also
dependent on the momentary phase angle at increase the bounce time of contact "A".
which the coil is being excited. For miniature
relays it is in most cases one half-wave. For Note that the load conditions (particularly in
the larger relay it is 7 to 16 ms; the reset time case of heavy inrush current or under a load
4. Stray circuits The next diagram illustrates stray circuits. The open, a follow-up circuit is created by A, R1,
closed contacts A, B and C, after operation of R2 and R3, and the relays may hum or they
(Shunts) In follow-up circuits it must be relays R1, R2 and R3. If contacts B and C are may be prevented from dropping out. The
ensured that no shunts are created, so as to circuit (b) is correctly executed. In DC
avoid false or irregular operations. As shown operation stray circuits can be avoided by
in the following diagram, two terminals must using an isolating diode.
be provided as power supply to prepare for
follow-up circuits; the top terminal is always
"+" and the bottom "–". (The same applies in
AC operation).– So the "+" side is always the
side on which contact circuits (contacts for
relays, timers, limit switches, etc.) are con-
structed and the "–" side is the load side
(for relay coil, timer coil, solenoid, cylinder
coil, motor, lamp, etc.).
5. Phase synchronisation when switching AC loads
If the relay always switches at the same phase angle due to feedback from the load to the actuation, this may shorten the electrical life and
cause fusing or locking of the contacts as a result of material migration. So the relay should be observed on the basis of the specific application
case. When operating relays with timers, microcomputers or thyristors etc., there may be synchronisation with the power supply.
6. False switching due to inductive coupling
In the case of long lines: If the load and control feeds use the same electrical cable, the induction from the current line may produce an induction
voltage on the coil. It is irrelevant whether the control signal is on or off. In this case relays and timers are not reset. Note that cables covering
long stretches may suffer false relay switching due to problems in capacity distribution. External influences such as lightning strikes etc. may
also cause equipment failure.
1.7
7. Long-term current flow
In applications involving long operations (such as emergency lights, anti-theft security systems and test mechanisms) it is advisable to
preferentially use normally-open contacts for continuous operation. Continuous and long-term voltage on the coil may impair the coil insulation,
and increased coil heat-up may shorten the service life. Bi-stable relays should be used for these applications. If you use a single stable relay,
you should select a plastic-sealed variant which is little responsive to ambient conditions, and a more fail-safe circuit arrangement.
8. Rare switching operations
If a switch is executed only once a month, or even less, you should carry out regular contact testing. If the contacts are not switched for a lengthy
period of time, deposits may form on the surface, leading to instability of the contacts.
8. Electrolytic corrosion of the coils • If earthing is not required, connect the earth connection to the "-" side
of the coil. (See Fig. c – LF and R relay with earth connection)
When using relays with comparatively high coil voltage, electrolytic
corrosion may occur, especially in conditions of high humidity. To avoid
open circuits, you should pay particular attention to the following points.
• The "+" side of the voltage source should be connected to the base
plate. (See Fig. a) – This applies to all relays)
c) Evaluation: ok
• If the "-" side of the voltage source is earthed, avoid using the
contacts (and switches) on the "+" side. (See Fig. d – This applies
to all relays)
• Where earthing of the "+" side is unavoidable, or where earthing is not
possible: Set the contacts (or the switch) on the "+" side of the voltage • If the relay has an earth connection which not needed for operation,
source. (See Fig. b – This applies to all relays) it should not be connected, so as to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
Note: The diagram shows that the insulation resistor has been inserted
between the iron core and chassis earth. In a relay with earth connec-
b) Evaluation: ok tion the iron core could be earthed directly on the chassis.
Precautions on the contact
• Contacts
The contacts are the most important components of the relay. The performance capability of the contact is dictated primarily by the contact
material, the switching voltage and current (particularly at the point of switching on and off), the type of load, the switching frequency, the
ambient atmosphere, the contact form, the switching speed and the contact bounce. The following points should be considered in order to avoid
material migration, contact fusing, excessive burn-off, increased contact resistance and various other causes of failure: *It is advisable to clarify
the usage in advance with our sales offices.
1.8
Basic rules relating to the relay contact
• AC/DC
If the load contains an inductive component, a quite high counter-EMF (induction voltage) will be generated which increases the switch-off
voltage. The energy discharged on the contacts causes burn-off and material migration. So it is not necessary to suppress the arc by means
of a suitable RC element. With direct voltage there is no zero crossing where the arc self-extinguishes. Once an arc has been generated, it is
difficult to suppress. The extended arc dwell time poses the main problem for the contacts. Also, the direction of the current is pre-determined,
resulting in increased material migration (on one side). The approximate value of the RC element is usually specified in the catalogue or data
sheet, but that value alone is mostly not sufficient. Customers will create a circuitry configuration best suited to their specific application case.
For inductive loads it is generally advisable to use relays suitable for switching 125 VAC. The catalogue specifies the minimum loads, though
they only apply as a guideline for the switching capacity of the relay and do not represent exact values. These minimum values are influenced
by the switching frequency, the ambient conditions and the contact friction travel.
• Switching current
The current is a key influencing factor in both the closing and opening of the contacts. If a motor or lamp is switched as the load for example, the
higher inrush current causes a correspondingly greater burn-off and material migration.
So after a while a contact response or fusing occurs.
Properties of commonly used contact materials

Contact material Typical properties Typical Guide values for
applications application field
Ag The electrical and thermal conductivity of silver is Universally usable under ≥ 12 V

(silver) higher than that of any other material. Silver has a low medium load as an alloy ≥ 10 mA
contact resistance and is cheap and widely available. with nickel (AgNi0,15)
A disadvantage is that silver readily forms sulphide film Usable for DC circuits with
in sulphide atmosphere. Care needs to be taken at low medium to high load
voltage and current.
AgSnO2 The resistance to fusing of silver/tin is even better than Application heavily ≥ 12 V
(silver/tin) silver/cadmium. As in the case of silver, a sulphide film dependent on relay type ≥ 100 mA
forms in sulphide atmosphere. Usable for high switch-on
and switch-off loads
AgW The hardness and melting point of silver/tungsten are Specially for loads with ≥ 60 V
(silver/tungsten) high, its resistance to arcing is excellent, and the very high inrush currents ≥ 1000 mA
material migration extremely low. A high contact e.g. in building lighting
pressure is required however. The contact resistance applications
is relatively high and the resistance to corrosion poor.
AgNi Silver/nickel has a similar electrical conductivity to Usable for DC circuits with ≥ 12 V
(silver/nickel) silver. It has arc-extinguishing properties. medium to high load, ≥ 10 mA
inductive loads
Contact surface Typical properties Typical Guide values for

applications application field
Au coating Gilding has a similar effect to gold plating. Depending For low loads only µV to 30 V
(gilding) on the galvanisation method employed, it is very µA to 200 mA
important to monitor the process, because there is
a risk of pores and cracks forming. The use of gilded
contacts in existing relays is relatively simple.
Gold-flashing The purpose of gilding is to protect the contact base Purely in-storage protection
(application of a thin material during storage of the relays or of the device in
gold layer) which the relay is installed. A degree of contact stability
01 to 0.5 can be attained in load switching however.
1.9
Contact protection
• Self-induction voltage
When switching inductive loads with a relay, such as in relay

sequence circuits, DC motors, DC clutches and DC solenoids, it is
always important to absorb surge voltages (e.g. with a diode) so as to
protect the contacts. If those inductive loads are switched off, a self-
induction voltage of several hundred to thousand Volts develops
which may seriously damage the contacts and severely shorten
service life.
If the current in those loads is relatively low, and around 1 A, the self-
induction voltage may cause ignition of a glow or arc discharge. The self-induction voltage is carried through the power supply cable
During discharging organic material in the air decomposes and pro- and reaches the two contacts. The electrical ignition voltage at
duces black residues (oxides, carbides) which are deposited on the standard temperature and air pressure is generally approximately
contacts. This may result in contact failure. 200 to 300 Volts. If the self-induction voltage exceeds this value,
In Figure (a) a self-induction voltage (e = –L di/dt) with a steep wave a discharge takes place on the contacts which consumes the energy
form above the coil has been generated, with the polarity shown in stored in the coil (1/2Li2). For this reason it is desirable to absorb the
Figure (b) being switched off at the point the inductive load is applied. self-induction voltage, so that it is a maximum of 200 V.
• Material migration phenomenon For DC capacitive loads (several Amperes up to several tens of
Amperes) it is always necessary to perform confirmation tests under
Material migration on contacts takes place when a contact melts and real conditions.
the contact material transfers to other contacts. As the number of
switching operations increases, uneven contact surfaces develop. After
a certain time, the uneven contacts are solidly joined together as if they
were fused. This happens, for example, when discharges occur due to
inductive or capacitive loads. As a countermeasure, contact circuits and
materials resistant to material migration are used, such as AgSnO2,
AgW or AgCu. Generally a concave form appears on the cathode and
a convex form on the anode.
Material migration on contacts
• Contact protection circuit
Induction voltages can be reduced by contact protection circuits. Note, however, that incorrect application may have the opposite effect.
The following table sets out typical circuits of this kind.
Use
Circuit Properties/Other Component selection
AC DC
If the load is a timer element, the stray current As a guideline in selecting r and c: c: 0.5 to
flows through the RC circuit and causes 1μF per 1A switching current; r: 0.5 to 1 Ω
misoperation.* In an application with alternat- per 1V switching voltage. The values are
B* O ing voltage make sure the impedance of the dependent on the load and the variations
load is sufficiently smaller than the RC circuit. in the relay properties. The capacitor C
suppresses the discharge on contact open-
RC circuit
ing. The resistor limits the current on the

next switching operation.
If the load is a relay or solenoid, the reset time Please perform confirmation tests. Use
is extended. The circuit is effective if connect- a capacitor with a voltage resistance
ed to both contacts as soon as the supply volt- (dielectric strength) of 200 to 300 V.
O O
age is 24 or 48 V and the voltage via the load For AC circuits you need an unpolarised
is 100 to 200V. AC capacitor.
The diode switched on in the reverse direction Use a diode with a breakdown voltage
parallel to the load shorts the self-induction in reverse direction corresponding to at
voltage created when the contacts open. In least ten times the switching voltage. In
Diode circuits
the process the energy stored in the inductive electronic circuits in which the voltage is
X O load is converted into heat in the ohmic com- not so high, a diode with a breakdown volt-
ponent of the inductor. This circuit further age in reverse direction of approximately
extends the reset time compared to the RC two to three times the switching voltage
circuit (two to five times the reset time speci- can be used.
fied in the catalogue).
1.10
Use
Circuit Properties/Other Component selection
AC DC
The circuit is effective when the reset time in Please use a Zener diode with a Zener
the diode circuit is too long. voltage roughly matching the switching
Diode circuits
voltage.
X O
Using the constant voltage properties of the

varistor, this circuit prevents particularly high
Varistor circuit
voltages over the contacts. This circuit also

slightly extends the reset time. The circuit is
O O
effective when connected to both contacts as
soon as the switching voltage via the load is
100 to 200V.
• Avoid using the protective circuits shown in

the diagrams on the right. As inductive DC
loads are more difficult to switch than ohmic
loads, use of a protective circuit is recom-
mended.
Although they are extremely effective in arc Although they are extremely effective in
suppression when contacts open, the contacts arc suppression when contacts open, the
are subject to fusing, as energy is stored in C contacts are subject to fusing, as energy is
which causes a short when the contacts close. stored in C which causes a short when the
contacts close.
• Mounting the protective device
In the circuit it is necessary to locate the protective device (diode, resistor, capacitor, varistor, etc.) in the immediate vicinity of the load or the
contact. If the protective device is too far away, its efficacy may decrease. As a guideline, a distance up to 50 cm should be applied.
• Anomalous corrosion during high-frequency switching of DC loads (sparking)
If a DC valve or clutch, for example, is switched at high frequency, corrosion may develop. It is produced by reaction with the nitrogen in the air
when a discharge occurs during switching. So care must be taken if discharges at high
Precautions when switching inductive loads
• Switching of load and contacts
Switch the load on one side of the power feed - see following Figure a) - and switch the contacts on the other side. This will prevent high
voltages occurring between the contacts. If the contacts are switched on both sides of the power feed - Figure b) - there is a risk of short-circuit
in the event of flash-over when contacts are located very close together for design reasons.
E E Ry
a) b)
Ry Ry Ry
a) Good example b) Bad example
1.11
• Impedance
As the voltage level on contacts used in low current circuits (dry circuits) is low, this frequently results in low conductivity. Stability can be
improved by adding an impedance parallel to the load so as to purposely increase the load current applied to the contacts.
• Avoidance of short-circuits between working and normally-open contacts
1) In compact devices the distance between the contacts of form A and B may be small. The occurrence of short-circuits due to flash-over
must be assumed.
2) Even if the three N.C., N.O. and COM contacts are configured so that they can short, no possibility of blow-out may exist.
3) Circuits to reverse the direction of rotation of motors must not be constructed with normally-open contacts and working contacts of
the same contact set.
1) R1, R2: Relay contacts 2) 3) R1, R2: Relay contacts

R: Relay with 2 switches R: Relay with 2 switches
• Short-circuits between contact sets
Although there is a clear trend towards the miniaturisation of electronic circuits, special attention must be paid to selection of suitable relay types.
This applies in particular to multiple relays between which different voltages are switched. This problem is not detectable from diagrams for follow-
up circuits. Instead, the entire design of the device must be investigated and adequate safety reserves must be ensured in terms of creepages and
clearances, voltage resistance, contact pitch, etc.
• Load type and starting current
The load type and inrush current, together with the switching frequency, are key factors in terms of contact life. Particularly in the case of loads
with inrush currents, the continuous current and the inrush current should be measured. Select a relay with an adequate safety factor. The table
on the right shows the relationship between typical loads and their inrush currents. Also check the differing momentary polarity according to the
specific relay, as the service life depends on the polarity of the COM and NO contacts.
MDI-X Inrush current
Ohmic load Continuous current
Solenoid load 10 to 20 times the continuous current
Motor load 5 to 10 times the continuous current
Bulb load 10 to 15 times the continuous current
Mercury lamp load 3 times the continuous current
Sodium-vapour lamp load 1 to 3 times the continuous current
Capacitive load 20 to 40 times the continuous current
Transformer load 5 to 15 times the continuous current
• When using long cables
If long cables (100 to 300 m) are used in a relay contact circuit, the
inrush current may cause problems due to the stray capacitance
between the cables. So please insert a resistor (approximately
10 to 50 Ω) in series with the contacts.
1.12
• Phase synchronisation when switching AC loads
If the relay always switches at the same phase angle due to feedback from the load to the actuation, this may shorten the electrical life and
cause fusing or locking of the contacts as a result of material migration. So the relay should be observed on the basis of the specific application
case. When operating relays with timers, microcomputers or thyristors etc., there may be synchronisation with the power supply.
• Service life at high temperatures
Check under the momentary load whether the service life is influenced by use at high temperatures
Notes
1.13
Solid State Relays - Terminology

Control side
Semiconductor relays - also known as solid state relays (SSRs) - are an alternative to mechanical relays in many applications. Although these
devices belong to the general category of relays, they are actually not relays. They are in fact electronic devices. The basis of a solid state relay
is very often an optocoupler with a downstream additional electronic switching element in the form of a transistor, triac or MOSFET.
Input side Output side
Optical coupler
DC input
Thanks to the LED in the input circuit of the optocoupler, different voltage levels can be adapted to by adding a specially selected electronics
unit. To prevent the electronics unit from being destroyed by an incorrectly connected operating voltage, an anti-polarity reversal protective diode
is additionally inserted into the control circuit.
A1 +13
Input side Output side

K
A2 14
Reverse diode
AC input
Safe operation with an alternating voltage requires an upstream electronics unit to generate a stable control voltage. This is attained by means
of a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor. The smoothing capacitor reduces the possible switching frequency to a maximum of half the mains
frequency. At higher frequencies the input circuit would continually switch through.
A1
~
~
A2
Load side
A wide variety of demands are placed on the output circuit depending on the application case and load type. Decisive factors here are:
– Power amplification
– Adaptation to switching voltage/current (AC/DC)
– Short-circuit protection
Here, too, an upstream electronics unit must be installed.
DC output
To attain the specified output power, the optocoupler output is provided with a power stage. To that end, bipolar transistors or MOSFETs
are used in DC operation. That is irrelevant for practical operation, however, as the terminals can still be regarded as conventional switch
connections. Only the specified polarity must be observed as a mandatory requirement.
1.14

To select the correct switching output the following criteria should be applied:
1. Operating voltage range
The specified minimum and maximum values must be observed in order to ensure safe function. In order to protect the switching transistor, the
upper value must not be exceeded.
2. Maximum continuous current
This value dictates the maximum permissible continuous current. Note in this context that the current is dependent on the ambient temperature.
The actual continuous current is derived from the available derating curves. Overranging of the continuous current will in a short time result in
destruction of the switching element.
3. Output circuit
In DC operation a distinction is made between a 2-conductor and a 3-conductor output.
The 2-conductor output can be considered equivalent to a mechanical contact. As opposed to a relay, here the polarity must be observed.
A1
+
13
+ Principle: 2-conductor circuit
– RL
A2 14
By contrast, a 3-conductor output is potential-specific. For safe operation it requires connection of both potentials of the output-side voltage
source. In the off state a fixed link to the negative potential (earth) is made. The advantage lies in an almost constant internal resistance.
A1 +
+
A Principle: 3—conductor circuit
– RL
A2 0
AC output
To switch alternating voltages, a semiconductor element for alternating voltage applications (triac) is installed downstream of the optical coupler
element. Here, too, the same restrictions on the maximum operating voltage and continuous current ranges dependent on ambient temperature
apply as in the case of the DC output. The maximum peak reverse voltage of the triac (e.g. 800 V) must additionally be considered in executing
the alternating voltage. It must not be exceeded, in the event of either voltage fluctuations or interference voltage spikes, without destroying the
triac. Consequently, all switching inductors must be wired accordingly.
Principl
Principle:
e: AC output
1.15

Protective circuits
Switching of inductive consumers such as contactors, valves, motors etc. always results in a high induction overvoltage with a very steep
rising edge at the moment of switch-off. The voltage, which can reach very high amplitudes, is additionally overlaid with a more or less broad
high-frequency spectrum. Electronic devices respond particularly sensitively to that. So a general protection against this interference is required.
Protective circuits are configured parallel to the load in order to restrict harmful induction voltages to a safe level. Different methods are available
depending on the optocoupler design and application case (load).
– RC elements for AC operation
– Varistors for AC and DC operation
– Free-wheeling/suppressor diode for DC operation
The correct protective circuit for the specific application guarantees problem-free, safe functioning of all LÜTZE optical coupler modules.
Protective circuit with DC voltage output
Protective circuit with AC voltage output
Application notes
+ +
1) + 13 A1
z. B. SPS e.g. position sensing with end contact or initiator

IN 14 A2
1)
1) 1) 1) 1)
A1 13
2) 2) 2)
z. B. SPS K1 M
~
e.g. switching of contactor, solenoid valve or motor (AC load)
OUT A2 14
1)
~N ~N ~N
3) 3) 3)
A1 13
~L
K1 M e.g. switching of contactor, solenoid valve or motor (DC load)
z. B. SPS ~
OUT A2 14
~
1)
1.16
General
What is product reliability?
1. Reliability in a narrow sense of the term
In the industrial space, reliability is a measure of how long a particular product operates without failure.
2. Product reliability in a broad sense of the term
Every product has a finite service lifetime. This means that no product can continue normal service infinitely. When a product has broken down,
the user may throw it away or repair it. The reliability of reparable products is recognised as "reliability in a broad sense of the term". For reparable
products, their serviceability or maintainability is another problem. In addition, reliability of product design is becoming a serious concern for the
manufacturing industry. In short, reliability has three senses: i.e. reliability of the product itself, serviceability of the product, and reliability of
product design.
3. Intrinsic reliability and reliability of use
Reliability is "built in" to products. This is referred to as intrinsic reliability which consists mainly of reliability in the narrow sense. Product
reliability at the user’s site is called "reliability of use", which consists mainly of reliability in the broad sense. In the relay industry, reliability of
use has a significance in aspects of servicing.
1. Reliability (narrow sense), durability

Long life: MTTF, B10, R(T)
Low failure rate: Lambda (I), MTBF Availability
Reliability
2. Maintainability
(broad sense)
MTTR
Preventive maintenance, predicted maintenance
3. Design reliability
Human factor, redundancy, fool-proof, fail-safe
Reliability measures
The following list contains some of the most popular 1.Degree of reliability
reliability measures.
Degree of reliability represents percentage ratio of reliability. For example: if none of
Reliability measures Sample representation 10 light bulbs has failed for 100 hours, the degree of reliability defined in 100 hours of
Degree of reliability R(T) 99.9% time is 10/10 = 100%. If only three bulbs remained alive, the degree of reliability is
MTBF 100 hours 3/10 = 30 %. The JIS Z8115 standard defines the degree of reliability as follows: The
MTTF 100 hours probability at which a system, equipment, or part provides the specified functions over
Failure rate Aλ 20 FIT, 1%/hr. the intended duration under the specified conditions.
Life B10 50 hours
2. MTBF
MTBF stands for Mean Time Between Failures. It designates the mean time between
two failures in a system, equipment unit or part. The MTBF can only be used for
repairable products. The MTBF value indicates how long a product can be used for
without being repaired. Sometimes the MTBF is also used to specify the service life
between repairs.
MTTF
3. MTTF
b) MTTF MTTF stands for Mean Time To Failure. It designates the mean time until a fault occurs
in the product. The MTTF is used for irreparable products such as components and
materials. The MTTF is normally applied to relays.
4. Failure rate
Failure rate includes mean failure rate and momentary failure rate. Mean failure rate
is defined as follows: Mean failure rate = total failures/total operating time In general,
failure rate refers to momentary failure rate. This represents the probability at which a
system, equipment, or part, which has continued normal operation to a certain point of
time, becomes faulty in the subsequent specified time period. Failure rate is most often
represented in the unit of percent/hours. For parts with low failure rates, "failure unit
(Fit) = 10–9/hour" is often used instead of failure rate. Percent/count is normally used
for relays.
1.17
General
5. Safe life
Safe life is an inverse of degree of reliability. It is given as value B which makes the following equation true: 1 – R(B) = t %
In general, „B[1 – R(B)] = 10 %“ is more often used. In some cases this represents a more practical value of reliability than MTTF.
Failure
1. What is failure?
Failure is defined as a state of system, equipment, or component in which part of all of its functions are impaired or lost.
2. Bathtub curve
A product’s failure rate throughout its lifetime is depicted as a bathtub curve (see diagram). Failure rate is high at the beginning and end of its
service lifetime.
(I) Initial failure period
The high failure rate in the initial failure period is derived from latent design errors, process errors, and many other causes. Initial failures are
screened at the manufacturer’s site through burn-in processes. This process is called debugging, performing aging or screening.
(II) Accidental failure period
The initial failure period is followed by a long period with low, stable failure rate. In this period, called accidental failure period, failures occurs at
random along the time axis. While zero accidental failure rate is desirable, this is actually not practical in the real world.
(III) Wear-out failure period
In the final stage of the product’s service lifetime comes the wear-out failure period, in which the life of the product expires due to wear or
fatigue. Preventive maintenance is effective for this type of failure. The timing of a relay’s wear-out failure can be predicted with a certain
accuracy from the past record of uses. The use of a relay is intended only in the accidental failure period, and this period virtually represents
the service lifetime of the relay.
3. Weibull analysis
Weibull analysis is often used for classifying a product’s failure patterns and to determine its lifetime. Weibull distribution is expressed by the
following equation:
m: Figure parameter α: Measurement parameter: γ:

Position parameter
Bathtub curve
Weibull distribution can be adopted to the actual failure rate distribution

if the three variables are estimated.
The Weibull probability chart is a simpler alternative to
complex calculation formulas. The chart provides the following advantages:
• The Weibull distribution has the closest proximity to the actual lifetime distribution.
• The Weibull probability chart is easy to use.
• Different types of failures can be identified on the chart. The following describes the correlation with the bathtub curve. The value of the
parameter "m" represents the type of failure.
• When m < 1: Initial failure
• When m = 1: Accidental failure
• When m > 1: Wear-out failure
1.18
Notes
1.19
Microplug Series
The Microplug series offers particularly good Suppressor modules Relay versions Type 2
value for money, and consists of relays, All AC/DC 6 V – 230 V 2 and 4 changeover contact versions
pluggable suppressor modules at the input,
locking levers, description plate and a
universally usable jumper.
All modules are largely compatible with

market standards, and all are UL approved.
The Microplug series offers the following

features:
• Switching current up to 16 A
Comb-type jumper bar
• LED status indicator Connect up to 6 modules
• Suppressor modules of different types Locking system

Mechanically stable and shock-proof
• Manual control
Relay versions Type 1

1 and 2 changeover contact versions
Labelling system
Large description plates allow labelling with
up to 18 characters.
1.20
·
Relay socket for mini and industrial relay

AC/DC 300 V
Screw terminal
Description Part-No. Type PU

Relay socket for mini relay
1/2 change over 770900 RES-0900 5
contact
Relay socket for industrial relay
2 change over 770903 RES-0903 5
contact
4 change over 770905 RES-0905 5
contact
General Relay socket for mini relay Relay socket for industrial relay
Nominal voltage AC/DC 300 V
Rated current AC/DC 12 A pro pin
Insulation voltage AC 5000 V
Protection class IP 20
Dimensions
Ambient temperature -40 °C
Relay socket for mini relay Maße (B×H×T) 16.5 × 75.0 × 66.5 mm (incl. release le- 27.2 × 75.0 × 82.0 mm (incl. release le-
ver) ver)
Accessories Article number Type PU
Jumper comb 10 A (mini relay) 770908 REP-0908 10
Tag holder (mini relay) 770902 REM- 902 10
Mounting bracket relay (mini relay) 770901 REE-0901 10
Mounting bracket relay (industrial 770906 REE-0906 10
relay)
Jumper comb 10 A (industrial relay) 770909 REI-0909 10
Tag holder (industrial relay) 770907 REM WT-0907 10
PIN assignment
Relay socket for mini relay
1.21
·
Pluggable microplug protection modules

AC/DC 6 – 230 V
with LED indication

Mini relay with AgNi
Nominal voltage DC 6/24 V 770911 PM41G-0911 10
AC 6/24 V 770913 PM91G-0913 10
DC 110 V 770916 PM43G-0916 10
AC/DC 110/230 V 770917 PM93G-0917 10
General DC 6/24 V AC 6/24 V DC 110 V AC/DC 110/230 V

Protection device Overload diode Varistor Overload diode Varistor
Status Indication LED green
PIN assignment
DC 6/24 V
AC 6/24 V
DC 110 V
AC/DC 110/230 V
1.22
·
Mini relay, 1 changeover contact

AC 400 V/DC 300 V, 16 A, 4000 VA
Contact material: AgNi

Relay with AgNi
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770100 RE1W-0100 DC12 10
DC 24 V 770101 RE1W-0101 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770106 RE1W-0106 DC120 10
AC 12 V 770110 RE1W-0110 AC12 10
AC 24 V 770111 RE1W-0111 AC24 10
AC 120 V 770116 RE1W-0116 AC120 10
AC 230 V 770117 RE1W-0117 AC230 10
Input
Nominal voltage AC: 12 to 240 V, DC: 12 to 120 V
Input voltage AC: ±30 %, DC: ±20 %
Rated current –A
Dimensions Power comsumption AC: 0.75 VA, DC: 0.4 W
Interrupting voltage AC: ≥0.15 Un, DC: >0.1 Un
Input characteristic impedance –
Status Indication –
Output
Contact type 1 change over contact
Min. switching voltage AC/DC 5 V
Max. switching voltage AC 400 V / DC 300 V
Min. switching current AgNi: AC/DC 5 mA
Max. switching current AC1: 16 A / 250 V AC, DC1: 16 A / 24 V DC
Switching capacity DC 13 24 V: 2 A, 115 V: 300 mA, 230 V: 150 mA
Switching capacity AC 15 3.3 A
Inrush current 30 A (4 ms)
Max. switching capacity 4000 VA
Limit curve Resistor < 100 mΩ
Contact material AgNi
Switching frequency AC1: 600 cycles/hour, without load 72,000 cycles/hour
Mechanical service life >3 × 107 operations
Switch-on delay 15 ms
Switch-off delay 8 ms
Clearance/creep. dist.
> 10 mm
(contol/load side)
Rated insulation voltage (EN
AC 400 V (C 250/ B 400)
50178)
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 3
General
Protection class RTII - flux-tight
Shock resistance 10 g
Vibration resistance 10g, 10...150 Hz
Insulation voltage input/output 5.0 kVeff
Safe isolation yes
Operation temperature range -40 – 70 °C
Storage temperature range -40 – 85 °C
Dimensions (w × h × d) 29.0 × 15.7 × 12.7 mm
Weight (kg/piece) 0.014
Approvals UL, CSA, VDE
Termination plug-in
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
1.23
·
Mini relay, 2 changeover contact

AC 400 V/DC 300 V, 8 A, 2000 VA
Contact material: AgNi, AgNi+5 µm gold-plating

Relay with AgNi
DC 24 V 770920 RE2W-0920 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770922 RE2W-0922 DC120 10
AC 12 V 770926 RE2W-0926 AC12 10
AC 24 V 770928 RE2W-0928 AC24 10
AC 120 V 770930 RE2W-0930 AC120 10
AC 230 V 770924 RE2W-0924 AC230 10
Relay with AgNi + 5 µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770919 RE2WHV-0919 DC12 10
DC 24 V 770921 RE2WHV-0921 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770923 RE2WHV-0923 DC120 10
Dimensions Input Relay with AgNi Relay with AgNi + 5 µm HV

Nominal voltage AC: 12 to 240 V, DC: 12 to 120 V
Rated current –A
Power comsumption AC: 0.75 VA, DC: 0.4 W
Output
Min. switching current AgNi: AC/DC 5 mA AgNi+ 5 µm HV: AC/DC 2 mA
Limit curve
Inrush current 15A (4ms)
Resistor < 100 mΩ
Contact material AgNi AgNi+5 µm HV
Switching frequency AC1: 600 cycles/hour, without load 72,000 cycles/hour
> 10 mm
(contol/load side)
AC 400 V (C 250/ B 400)
50178)
Pollution degree 3
General
Protection class RTII - flux-tight
Vibration resistance 10 g, 10...150 Hz
Safe isolation yes
Approvals UL, CSA, VDE
Termination plug-in
Comments
To prevent damage to the gold layer, the stated values should not be exceeded.
At higher switching capacity, the gold layer vaporizes. The undercurrent in the housing can result in flashovers between coil -
contact.
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
1.24
·
Industrial relay, 2 changeover contact

AC/DC 250 V, 7 A, 1750 VA
Contact material: AgNi

Relay with AgNi
DC 24 V 770501 RE2W-0501 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770506 RE2W-0506 DC120 10
Input
Nominal voltage DC: 12 to 120 V
Input voltage DC: ±10 %
Rated current –A
Power comsumption DC: 0.9 W
Interrupting voltage DC: >0.1 Un
Dimensions Output
Max. switching voltage AC/DC 250 V
Resistor < 100 mΩ
Limit curve Switching frequency AC1: 1,200 cycles/hour, without load 18,000 cycles/hour
Air clearance: >2.5 mm, creep clearance: >4 mm
(contol/load side)
AC 250 V (C 250)
50178)
Pollution degree 3
General
Protection class RTI - dust proof
Safe isolation –
,,,, Operation temperature range -40 – 70 °C
Approvals cULus, TÜV, CQC
Termination plug-in
1.25
·
Industrial relay, 4 changeover contacts

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
Contact material: AgNi, AgNi+5 µm gold-plating

Relay with AgNi
DC 24 V 770401 RE4W-0401 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770406 RE4W-0406 DC120 10
AC 12 V 770410 RE4W-0410 AC12 10
AC 24 V 770411 RE4W-0411 AC24 10
AC 120 V 770416 RE4W-0416 AC120 10
AC 230 V 770417 RE4W-0417 AC230 10
Relay with AgNi + 5 µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770420 RE4WHV-0420 DC12 10
DC 24 V 770421 RE4WHV-0421 DC24 10
DC 120 V 770426 RE4WHV-0426 DC120 10
Dimensions Input Relay with AgNi Relay with AgNi + 5 µm HV

Nominal voltage AC: 12 to 240 V; DC: 12 to 120 V
Rated current –A
Power comsumption AC: 1.2 VA, DC: 0.9 W
Output
Limit curve Min. switching current AgNi: AC/DC 5 mA AgNi+ 5 µm HV: AC/DC 2 mA
Resistor < 100 mΩ
Contact material AgNi AgNi+5 µm HV
Switching frequency AC1: 1,200 cycles/hour, without load 18,000 cycles/hour
Air clearance: >1.6 mm, creep clearance: >3.2 mm
(contol/load side)
AC 250 V (B 250)
50178)
,, Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 3
General
Protection class RTI - dust proof
Safe isolation –
Approvals cULus, TÜV, CQC
Termination plug-in
Comments
contact.
1.26
·
DC-Relay-Interface, 1 CO contact, pluggable

AC 400 V/DC 300 V, 16 A, 4000 VA
Screw terminal, contact material: AgNi

Relay Module with AgNi
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770140 REP-0140 1W DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770141 REP-0141 1W DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770146 REP-0146 1W DC 115 V 5
Input DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 115 V
Input voltage range 8.4 – 18.0 V 16.8 – 36.0 V 77.0 – 165.0 V
Rated current 34.0 mA 17.0 mA 5.0 mA
Nominal voltage DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 115 V
Power comsumption 0.40 W
Interrupting voltage <1.2 V <2.4 V <11 V
Protection device overload diode
Max. length of connecting lead –
Dimensions Status Indication LED green
Output
Max. switching current AC/DC 16 A
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 2A; at 115 V: 300 mA; at 230 V, 150 mA
PIN assignment Clearance distance: > 10 mm; creepage distance: > 10mm
(contol/load side)
AC 400 V (category C 250)
50178)
General
Housing material PA66+GF V0 (UL)
Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Safe isolation Yes
Operation temperature range -40 °C – 85 °C
Storage temperature range -40 °C – 85 °C
Maße (B×H×T) 15.6 × 75.0 × 67.0 mm (including mounting bracket)
Approvals cULus
Limit curve Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–4.0 mm2
Accessories Colour Article number Type PU
Jumper comb 10A black 770908 REP-0908 10
Plate 770902 REM-0902 10
Mounting bracket relay 770901 REE-0901 10
1.27
·
AC-Relay-Interface, 1 CO contact, pluggable

AC 400 V/DC 300 V, 16 A, 4000 VA

Nominal voltage AC 12 V 770150 REP-0150 1W AC 12 V 5
AC 24 V 770151 REP-0151 1W AC 24 V 5
AC 120 V 770156 REP-0156 1W AC 120 V 5
AC 230 V 770157 REP-0157 1W AC 230 V 5
Input AC 12 V AC 24 V AC 120 V AC 230 V

Input voltage range 9.6 – 14.0 V 19.2 – 28.2 V 96.0 – 144.0 V 184.0 – 276.0 V
Rated current 130.0 mA 68.0 mA 14.0 mA 7.0 mA
Nominal voltage AC 12 V AC 24 V AC 120 V AC 230 V
Power comsumption 0.75 VA
Interrupting voltage <1.2 V <3.6 V <17.3 V <34.5 V
Protection device varistor
Dimensions Max. length of connecting lead –
Output
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 2 A, at 115 V: 300 mA, at 230 V: 150 mA
PIN assignment Clearance/creep. dist.
Clearance distance: > 10 mm; creepage distance: > 10mm
(contol/load side)
50178)
General
Safe isolation Yes
Limit curve Approvals cULus
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–4.0 mm2
1.28
·

AC 400 V / DC 300 V, 8 A, 2000 VA
Screw terminal, Contact material: AgNi, AgNi 5 µm HV

Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770040 REP-0040 2W DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770041 REP-0041 2W DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770046 REP-0046 2W DC 115 V 5
Relay Module with AgNi + 5µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770240 REP-0240 2W HTV DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770241 REP-0241 2W HTV DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770246 REP-0246 2W HTV DC 115 V 5
Dimensions Power comsumption 0.40 W
Protection device Overload diode
Output Relay Module with AgNi Relay Module with AgNi + 5µm HV
Min. switching current AgNi: AC/DC 5 mA AgNi+5 µm HV: AC/DC 2 mA
Switching capacity AC 15 at 24 V: 3.1 A, at 230 V: 2 A
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 2A, at 115 V: 300 mA, at 230 V: 150 mA
Contact material AgNi AgNi + 5 µm HV
PIN assignment Mechanical service life >1 × 107 operations
Clearance distance: >10 mm; Creepage distance: >10 mm
(contol/load side)
50178)
General
Safe isolation yes
Limit curve Operation temperature range -40 °C – 85 °C
Approvals cULus
Comments
contact.
1.29
·
AC-Relay-Interface,2 CO contact, pluggable

AC 400 V/DC 300 V, 8 A, 2000 VA

Nominal voltage AC 12 V 770050 REP-0050 2W AC 12 V 5
AC 24 V 770051 REP-0051 2W AC 24 V 5
AC 120 V 770056 REP-0056 2W AC 120 V 5
AC 230 V 770047 REP-0047 2W AC 230 V 5

Interrupting voltage <1.2 V <3.6V <17.3 V <34.5 V
Protection device Varistor
Output
Switching capacity AC 15 at 24 V: 3.1 A, at 230 V: 2 A
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 2A, at 115 V: 300 mA, at 230 V: 150 mA
PIN assignment Clearance/creep. dist.
Clearance distance: >10 mm; Creepage distance: >10 mm
(contol/load side)
50178)
General
Safe isolation yes
Limit curve Weight (kg/piece) 0.062
Approvals cULus
1.30
·

AC/DC 250 V; 7 A, 1750 VA

Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770540 REI2-0540 2W DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770541 REI2-0541 2W DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770546 REI2-0546 2W DC 115 V 5
Dimensions Status Indication LED green
Output
Switching capacity AC 15 at 24 V: 2.5 A; at 230 V: 1.5 A
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 1.8A, at 115 V: 300 mA, at 230 V: 150 mA
Mechanical service life >2 x 107 operations
(contol/load side)
PIN assignment Rated insulation voltage (EN
50178)
General
Housing material PA 66+GF V0 (UL)
Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
Limit curve
1.31
·

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
Screw terminal, Contact material: AgNi, AgNi + 5 µm HV

Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770440 REI4-0440 4W DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770441 REI4-0441 4W DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770446 REI4-0446 4W DC 115 V 5
Relay Module with AgNi + 5µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 770460 REI4-0460 4W HTV DC 12 V 5
DC 24 V 770461 REI4-0461 4W HTV DC 24 V 5
DC 115 V 770466 REI4-0466 4W HTV DC 115 V 5
Protection device Overload diode
Output Relay Module with AgNi Relay Module with AgNi + 5µm HV
Min. switching current AgNi: AC/DC 5 mA AgNi+5 µm HV: AC/DC 2 mA
Switching capacity AC 15 at 24 V: 2.5 A, at 230 V: 1.5 A
Contact material AgNi AgNi + 5 µm HV
PIN assignment Switch-on delay 25 ms
(contol/load side)
AC 250 V (category B 250)
50178)
General
Safe isolation yes
Limit curve Maße (B×H×T) 27.2 × 75.0 × 82.0 mm (including mounting bracket)
Approvals cULus
Comments
contact.
1.32
·
AC-Relay-Interface, 4 CO contact, pluggable

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA

Nominal voltage AC 12 V 770450 REI4-0450 4W AC 12 V 5
AC 24 V 770451 REI4-0451 4W AC 24 V 5
AC 120 V 770456 REI4-0456 4W AC 120 V 5
AC 230 V 770457 REI4-0457 4W AC 230 V 5

Interrupting voltage <3.6 V <7.2 V <36 V <66 V
Output
Switching capacity AC 15 at 24 V: 2.5 A, at 230 V: 1.5 A
PIN assignment Air clearance: >2 mm, creep clearance: >3 mm
(contol/load side)
AC 250 V (category B 250)
50178)
General
Safe isolation yes
Maße (B×H×T) 27.2 × 75.0 × 82.0 mm
Approvals UL, CSA
1.33
Microcompact Series
Microcompact Interface Service-friendly and time-saving User-friendly

The universal interface between the controller • Thanks to easy exchange of relay or solid • Integrated interference protection for relay
and plant peripherals! state relays without disconnecting the wiring. and solid state relay interfaces.
• Relay interface with pluggable or integrated • Reduced wiring thanks to convenient • Standard plastic description plates.
relay pluggable jumper system
• Jumper facility for all potentials
• Solid state relay interface • LED status indication for each channel
State-of-the-art interface technology offering • Less space needed thanks to TOP

all the advantages of terminal blocks! connections with screw and spring-type
termination.
Safety
• Relays and solid state relays with safe
isolation to DIN EN 50178(VDE 0160)
• High-grade screw and spring termination

technique
1.34
Microcompact Series
LÜTZE Microcompact Standard LÜTZE Microcompact TOP LÜTZE Microcompact TOP, pluggable
Universally usable relay and solid Universally usable relay and solid Universally usable relay and solid
state relay interfaces in 6.2 mm state relay interfaces in 6.2 mm state relay interfaces in 6.2 mm
width, conventional termination width, with TOP termination width, with TOP termination
technique, with screw or spring. with screw or spring. with screw or spring.
LÜTZE Microcompact Standard LÜTZE Microcompact TOP, ECO LÜTZE Microcompact – Custom
Universally usable relay and solid Two independent relays in width 6.2 mm Whether for custom colours or specially
state relay interfaces, multi-channel, with TOP screw and spring type termination developed products – talk to us!
with conventional termination technique technique.
with screw or spring.
Increased requirements Global application LÜTZE Microcompact Accessories
Relays and solid state relays specially Thanks to approvals including UL and Microcompact accessories including
for increased requirements such as rail GL, global use in a wide variety of insulation plates, relays, solid state relays,
engineering or other applications with applications is possible. plug-in jumpers and markers.
similar requirements.
1.35
·
Replacement relay, 1 CO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Contact material: AgSnO2, AgSnO2+5 µm HV

Relay with AgSnO2
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 768001 Relais-SNR 12V 1W 20
DC 24 V 768002 Relais-SNR 24V 1W 20
DC 60 V 768003 Relais-SNR 60V 1W 20
Relay with AgSnO2 + 5 µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 768005 Relais-SNR 12V 1W HTV 20
DC 24 V 768006 Relais-SNR 24V 1W HTV 20
DC 60 V 768007 Relais-SNR 60V 1W HTV 20
Input
Nominal voltage DC: 12 to 60 V
Input voltage DC: ±30 %
Rated current –A
Dimensions Power comsumption DC: 170 mW
Interrupting voltage DC: >0.1 Un
Output
Min. switching voltage AgSnO2: AC/DC 17 V; AgSnO2+5 µm HV: AC/DC 1 V
Min. switching current AgSnO2: AC/DC 5 mA, AgSnO2+ 5 µm HV: AC/DC 1mA
Limit curve Max. switching current 6A
Switching capacity AC 15 3A
Resistor AgSnO2: < 100 mΩ; AgSnO2+5 µm HV: < 30 mΩ
Contact material AgSnO2 / AgSnO2+5 µm HV
Switching frequency with load: 6 cycles/minute, without load 1,200 cycles/minute
Switch-off delay 2.5 ms
Air clearance: >6 mm, creep clearance: >8 mm
(contol/load side)
AC 250 V
50178)
Pollution degree 3
General
Protection class RTIII - wash-tight
Shock resistance 5g
Safe isolation yes
Approvals VDE, cULus
Termination plug-in
1.36
·
AC/DC-Relay-Interface, 1, Relay with 1 CO contact, pluggable

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 760828 RE 7-0828 DC 12V 5
DC 24 V 760821 RE 7-0821 DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 760822 RE 7-0822 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 115 V 760826 RE 7-0826 AC/DC 115 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 760827 RE 7-0827 AC/DC 230 V 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 761828 RE 7-1828 DC 12V 5
DC 24 V 761821 RE 7-1821 DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 761822 RE 7-1822 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 115 V 761826 RE 7-1826 AC/DC 115 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 761827 RE 7-1827 AC/DC 230 V 5
Dimensions Input DC 12 V DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 115 V AC/DC 230 V

Input voltage range 184.0 –
10.2 – 15.0 V 20.4 – 30.0 V 16.8 – 30.0 V 92.0 – 126.5 V
253.0 V
Interrupting voltage <2 V < 2.4 V <11 V <23 V
Protection device Bridge rectifier Reverse diode Bridge rectifier
50 V 150 V 250 V
50178)
Max. length of connecting lead DC: 2000 m DC: 500 m DC: 500 m
2000 m
AC: 100 m AC: 70 m AC: 40 m
Status Indication LED yellow
Rated frequency – 50–60 Hz
Output –
PIN assignment Max. switching voltage AC/DC 250 V
DC 12 V, DC 24 V Min. switching current AC/DC 5 mA
Contact material AgSn02
Switch-on delay 5 ms 7 ms 8 ms
Switch-off delay 4 ms 7 ms 13 ms
AC/DC 24 V Clearance/creep. dist.
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
50178)
General
Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94 V-0)
AC/DC 115 V, AC/DC 230 V Protection class IP 20
Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
Limit curve Termination Screw-/spring terminal 0.5–1.5 mm2
Accessories Colour 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 8-pole 16-pole PU
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
6 A jumper comb white 762803 762806 762813 762823 762833 10
6 A jumper comb blue 762804 762807 762814 762824 762834 10
Replacement relay for 76X821 768002 Relay SNR 24V 1W 20
Spare relay for 76X822 / 76x828 768001 Relay SNR 12V 1W 20
Replacement relay for 76X826 / 768003 Relay SNR 60V 1W 20
76X827
Tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT-0411 100
Isolation plate 760809 TP 7-0809 5
Comments
For operation with rated voltage and 100% ED over 24h/day, a distance of = 10 mm must be complied with between the mo-
dules or to the neighboring switching components.
1.37
·
AC/DC-Relay-Interface, 1 Relay with 1 CO contact, pluggable

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Screw-/spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2 + 5 µm HV

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 760921 RE 7-0921 HTV DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 760922 RE 7-0922 HTV AC/DC 24 V 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 761921 RE 7-1921 HTV DC 24 V 5
Input DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 115 V AC/DC 230 V

Dimensions Rated current 14.0 mA 21.0 mA 5.0 mA
Interrupting voltage < 2.4 V <11 V <23 V
Protection device Overload diode Bridge rectifier
50 V 150 V 250 V
50178)
Max. length of connecting lead DC: 2000 m DC: 500 m
2000 m 250 m
AC: 100 m AC: 70 m
Output –
Min. switching current AC/DC 1 mA
PIN assignment Switching capacity AC 15 3A
DC 24 V Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 1 A, at 115 V: 200 mA, at 230 V: 100 mA
Contact material AgSn02 + 5 µm HV
Mechanical service life >5 x 106 operations 5 x 106 operations
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
AC/DC 24 V 50178)
General
AC/DC 115 V, AC/DC 230 V Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
Termination Screw-/spring terminal 0.5–1.5 mm2
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Limit curve 6 A jumper comb white 762803 762806 762813 762823 762833 10
Replacement relay for 76X921 768006 Relay SNR 24V 1W HTV 20
Replacement relay for 76X922 768005 Relay SNR 12V 1W HTV 20
Replacement relay for 76X926 / 768007 Relay SNR 60V 1W HTV 20
760927
Comments
Hard gold-plated contacts: So that the gold layer is not damaged, the specified values are not permitted to be exceeded. At
higher switching capacity, the gold layer vaporizes. The deposition in the housing can lead to sparkovers between the coil and
contact.
1.38
·
Semiconductor relay, 2-conductor technology, pluggable

Switching element max. DC 24 V/2 A, AC 230 V/0.75 A
Screw-/spring terminal

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 760313 OT 7-0313 5
DC 24 V 760693 OT 7-0693 5
AC 230 V 760312 OT 7-0312 5
AC 230 V 760692 OT 7-0692 5
Spring terminal
DC 24 V 761693 OT 7-1692 5
AC 230 V 761312 OT 7-1312 5
AC 230 V 761692 OT 7-1692 5
Input 76x313 76x693 76x312 76x692

Nominal voltage DC 24 V AC 230 V
Dimensions Load DC 24 V/2 A AC 230 V/0.75 A DC 24 V/0.5 A AC 230 V/0,75 A
Input voltage range 16.8 – 30.0 V 77.0 – 250.0 V
Rated current < 10 mA < 4 mA
Interrupting voltage <11 V <25 V
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Triac, NO contact, Triac, NO contact,
MosFet, NO con- MosFet, NO con-
zero-voltage zero-voltage
tact tact
switching switching
Min. switching voltage DC 10 V AC 18 V DC 10 V AC 18 V
Max. switching voltage DC 30 V AC 240 V DC 30 V AC 240 V
Min. switching current 1 mA 5 mA 1 mA 5 mA
Max. switching current 2A 0.75 A 2A 5 mA
PIN assignment Inrush current –
76x313 Leakage current < 50 µA
Switch-on delay < 150 µs 1 ms < 150 µs 1 ms
Switch-off delay < 300 µs 10 ms < 300 µs 10 ms
Switching frequency 1 kHz 20 Hz 1 kHz 20 Hz
–
(control/load side)
Protection device output Supp. diode RC module Supp. diode RC module
76x693 General
Housing material PA, UL 94-V0 –
Protection class IP 20 IP –
Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022) –
Insulation voltage input/output – kVeff
Safe isolation yes –
76x312 Operation temperature range -25 °C – 70 °C
Weight (kg/piece) 0.030 –
Approvals – –
Termination Screw/spring terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2 –
76x692 6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT -0411 100
1.39
·
AC/DC Solid State Relay, 2 wire, pluggable

Switching element AC 275 V 750 mA

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 760691 OT 7-0691 AC/DC 24 V 5
Spring terminal
Input AC/DC 24 V
Input voltage range 16.8 – 30.0 V
Rated current 14.0 mA
Interrupting voltage 11 V11 V
Protection device Bridge rectifier
Rated frequency 50-60 Hz
Output
Dimensions Switching element Triac, N/O contact
Min. switching voltage AC 12 V
Max. switching voltage AC 275 V
Min. switching current AC 5 mA
Max. switching current AC 750 mA (Derating)
Leakage current 1.5 mA
Switching frequency < 100 Hz
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
Protection device output –
General
PIN assignment
Safe isolation yes
Derating Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT -0411 100
1.40
·
AC/DC Solid State Relay, 2 wire, pluggable

Switching element DC 30 V, 3 A

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input AC/DC 24 V
Interrupting voltage <2.4 V
Rated frequency 50–60 Hz
Output
Dimensions Switching element Transistor, N/O contact
Min. switching voltage DC 0.5 V
Max. switching voltage DC 30 V
Min. switching current DC 10 mA
Max. switching current DC 3 A (Derating)
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switching frequency <100 Hz
–
(contol/load side)
General
PIN assignment
Safe isolation yes
Derating
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Backup relay 768009 SSR-DC 30 V 3A 20
Tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT -0411 100
1.41
·
AC/DC-Relay-Interface, 1 Relay with 1 CO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Screw-/spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 V 760020 RE 6-0020 DC 12 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 760022 RE 6-0022 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 120 V 760026 RE 6-0026 AC/DC 120 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 760027 RE 6-0027 AC/DC 230 V 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 761022 RE 6-1022 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 120 V 761026 RE 6-1026 AC/DC 120 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 761027 RE 6-1027 AC/DC 230 V 5
Input DC 12 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V

Dimensions Interrupting voltage <1.5 V <2.4 V 11 V <23 V
50 V 150 V 300 V
50178)
Output
PIN assignment Max. switching current AC/DC 6 A
ÿÿ ÿÿ
Switching capacity DC 13 at 24 V: 1 A; at 115 V: 200 mA; at 230 V: 100 mA
ÿÿ
ÿÿ Max. switching capacity 1500 VA
ÿÿ Contact material AgSnO2
Mechanical service life > 5 x 107 operations
Limit curve Switch-on delay 5 ms 10 ms
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
50178)
Inrush current 16 A, 4 ms
General
Housing material PPE
Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus, not 760020 cULus
Jumper comb 24-pin, 26 A blue 760801 BK 6-0801 5
Comments
1.42
·

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Screw-/spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2 + 5 µm HV

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 760222 RE 6-0222 HTV AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 120 V 760226 RE 6-0226 AC/DC 120 V 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 761222 RE 6-1222 HTV AC/DC 24 V 5
Input AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 230 V AC/DC 120 V

Interrupting voltage <2.4 V <23 V <11 V
50 V 300 V 150 V
Dimensions 50178)
Output
PIN assignment Max. switching capacity 1500 VA
Contact material AgSnO2+ 5 µm HV
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ Switch-on delay 5 ms 10 ms 5 ms
ÿÿ Switch-off delay 10 ms 15 ms 10 ms
Limit curve >5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
50178)
Inrush current 16 A, 4 ms
General
Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
Comments
contact. For operation with rated voltage and 100% ED over 24h/day, a distance of = 10 mm must be complied with between
the modules or to the neighboring switching components.
1.43
·
Semiconductor relay, 2-conductor technology

Switching element DC 30 V, 100 mA, wide-range input
Screw-/ Spring terminal

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 110–230 V 760307 OT 6-0307 AC/DC 110–230 V 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 110–230 V 761307 OT 6-1307 AC/DC 110–230 V 5
Input AC/DC 110–230 V

Interrupting voltage <20 V
Protection device Suppressor diode
Output
Min. switching voltage DC 10 V
Max. switching current DC 100 mA
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switching frequency –
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
PIN assignment Protection device output Suppressor diode
General
Safe isolation Yes
Approvals cULus
tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT-0411 100
1.44
·

Switching element DC 48 V, 0.5 A, 20 kHz
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 762082 OT 6-2082 DC 24 V 4
Input DC 24 V
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Transistor, N/O contact
Dimensions Max. switching voltage DC 48 V
Max. switching current DC 500 mA (Derating)
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switch-on delay 12 µs
Switch-off delay 12 µs
Switching frequency <20 kHz
>4.5 mm
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Suppressor diode
General
PIN assignment Housing material PPE
Safe isolation yes
Derating Dimensions (w × h × d) 6.2 × 78.0 × 86.0 mm
Approvals –
1.45
·
Semiconductor relay, 3-conductor, positive switching

Switching element DC 30 V, 1.7 A, short circuit-proof

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DC 24 V
Status Indication LED yellow, short circuit red
Rated frequency –
Output
Dimensions Switching element Transistor, NO contact – short circuit-proof (autostart)
Max. switching current DC 1.7 A (Derating)
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
ÿÿÿ
General
ÿÿÿÿ Housing material PPE
ÿÿÿ Protection class IP 20
ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿÿ
Safe isolation yes
Derating
Approvals cULus
Jumper comb 24pole, 26A blue 760801 BK 6-0801 5
1.46
·

Switching element DC 30 V, 5 A, short circuit-proof

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DC 24 V
Status Indication LED yellow, short circuit and wire breakage: LED red "ON" at I < 0.5 A, I > 5A
Rated frequency –
Output
Dimensions Switching element Transistor, NO contact – short circuit-proof (autostart)
Max. switching current DC 5 A (Derating)
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
General
Safe isolation yes
Derating Storage temperature range -40 °C – 80 °C
Approvals –
1.47
·

Switching element DC 48 V, 0.5 A

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DC 24 V
Protection device Reverse voltage protection
Rated frequency –
Output
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switching frequency max. 50 Hz
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
General
Derating Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
1.48
·

Switching element DC 48 V, 0.5 A, changeover function
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Input DC 24 V
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Transistor NPN / PNP, change over contact
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switching frequency <1 kHZ
>4.5 mm
(contol/load side)
General
PIN assignment Housing material PPE
A1 Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
+11
12 Insulation voltage input/output 3.8 kVeff
Safe isolation yes
A2
14 Operation temperature range -25 °C – 60 °C
Action chart Dimensions (w × h × d) 6.2 × 78.0 × 86.0 mm
Approvals –
1.49
·

Switching element AC 250 V, 1 A
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 762056 OT 6-2056 AC 230 V 20
Input DC 24 V
Protection device Reverse voltage protection
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Triac, N/O contact
Dimensions Max. switching voltage AC 240 V
Max. switching current AC 1 A
Inrush current –
Leakage current –
Switch-on delay 0.1 ms
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
General
Safe isolation yes
Approvals –
1.50
·
AC/DC-Relay-Interface,1 Relay with 1 CO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Screw/spring terminal, contact material AgSnO2

Screw terminal
DC 24 V 762312 RE 7-2312 DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 762313 RE 7-2313 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 115 V 762316 RE 7-2316 AC/DC 115 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 762317 RE 7-2317 AC/DC 230 V 5
Spring terminal
DC 24 V 762302 RE 7-2302 DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 24 V 762303 RE 7-2303 AC/DC 24 V 5
AC/DC 115 V 762306 RE 7-2306 AC/DC 115 V 5
AC/DC 230 V 762307 RE 7-2307 AC/DC 230 V 5
Dimensions Input DC 12 V DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 115 V AC/DC 230 V

Input voltage range 184.0 –
10.2 – 15.0 V 20.4 – 30.0 V 16.8 – 30.0 V 92.0 – 126.5 V
253.0 V
Rated current 17.0 mA 10.0 mA 20.0 mA 4.0 mA 3.5 mA
Interrupting voltage <2 V <2.4 V <11 V <23 V
Protection device Reverse- / overload diode Bridge rectifier
50 V 150 V 250 V
50178)
Max. length of connecting lead DC: 500 m DC: 500 m
2000 m
AC: 70 m AC: 40 m
PIN assignment Output –
DC 12 V, DC 24 V
Contact material AgSnO2
AC/DC 24 V
Switch-on delay 5 ms 8 ms
Switch-off delay 4 ms 13 ms
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
50178)
AC/DC 115 V, AC/DC 230 V
General
Safe isolation yes
Limit curve
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Comments
1.51
Interface Technology · Microcompact Solid State Relay

Switching element max. DC 24 V/10 A, AC 230 V/0.75 A

Screw terminal
load DC 24 V/0.5 A
DC 24 V 760320 OT 7-0320 5
DC 24 V/0.5 A
DC 24 V 760321 OT 7-0321 5
DC 24 V/2 A
DC 24 V 760322 OT 7-0322 5
DC 24 V/5 A
DC 24 V 760323 OT 7-0323 5
DC 24 V/10 A
DC 24 V 760340 OT 7-0340 5
AC 230 V/0.75A
Spring terminal
Dimensions Nominal voltage DC 5 V 761120 OT 7-1120 5
load DC 24 V/0.5 A
DC 24 V 761320 OT 7-1320 5
DC 24 V/0.5 A
DC 24 V 761321 OT 7-1321 5
DC 24 V/2 A
DC 24 V 761322 OT 7-1322 5
DC 24 V/5 A
DC 24 V 761323 OT 7-1323 5
DC 24 V/10 A
DC 24 V 761340 OT 7-1340 5
AC 230 V/0.75A
PIN assignment Input 76x120 76x320 76x321 76x322 76x323 76x340

76x120, 76x320, 76x321, 76x322 Input voltage range 4.0 – 6.0 V 19.2 – 30.0 V
Rated current > 4.5 mA > 4 mA
Interrupting voltage <2 V < 10 V <15 V
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Triac, NO
contact (ze-
76x323, 76x340 MosFet, NO contact
ro-voltage
switching)
Min. switching voltage DC 10 V AC 20 V
Max. switching voltage DC 48 V AC 240 V
Min. switching current 1 mA 10 mA 1 mA 5 mA
Max. switching current 10 A (Dera-
0.5 A 2A 5A 0.75 A
ting)
Inrush current –
Derating Leakage current < 50 µA 1 mA
Switch-on delay < 150 µs < 250 µs < 150 µs < 10 ms
Switch-off delay < 300 µs < 2ms < 300 µs < 10 ms
Switching frequency 1 kHz 50 Hz 1 kHz 100 Hz 10 Hz
–
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Suppressor diode Varistor
General
Housing material PA, UL 94-V0
Insulation voltage input/output – kVeff
Safe isolation yes
Operation temperature range 70 °C
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
1.52
Interface Technology · Microcompact Solid State Relay

Switching element max. DC 24 V/0.5 A, AC 230 V/0.75 A

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC 230 V 760350 OT 7-0350 5
AC 230 V 760341 OT 7-0341 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC 230 V 761350 OT 7-1350 5
AC 230 V 761341 OT 7-1341 5
Input 76x350 76x341

Nominal voltage AC 230 V
Load DC 24 V/0.5 A AC 230 V/0.75 A
Rated current <4 mA
Interrupting voltage <20 V <110 V
Dimensions Protection device Varistor
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Transistor Triac
Min. switching voltage DC 10 V AC 20 V
Max. switching voltage DC 48 V AC 240 V
Min. switching current 10 mA 5 mA
Max. switching current 0.5 A 0.75 A
Inrush current –
Leakage current 50 µA <1 mA
Switch-on delay < 2 ms <10 ms
Switch-off delay <1 ms <10 ms
PIN assignment Switching frequency 1 kHz 3 Hz
–
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Suppressor diode Varistor/RC
General
Housing material PA, UL 94-V0
Safe isolation yes
Approvals –
Termination Screw terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2 Spring terminal 0.14–1.5 mm2
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Labels for laser printer A4 unpun- 681031 LEB-A4 1
ched
1.53
·

Switching element AC/DC 250 V, 2 A

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DC 24 V
Interrupting voltage 10 V
Protection device Supressor diode
Rated frequency –
Output
Dimensions Switching element MosFet, N/O contact
Switching element –
Max. switching current AC/DC 2 A (Derating)
Inrush current AC/DC 8 A; 10 ms
Leakage current –
Switching frequency 500 Hz
>4 mm
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Varistor
PIN assignment General
Safe isolation yes
Derating
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Comments
Inductive loads must be wired with a suitable suppressor element!
1.54
·
DC-Relay-Interface, 2 Relay with 1 CO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
Screw-/spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DC 24 V
Protection device Reverse- / overload diode
50 V
50178)
Max. length of connecting lead 2000 m
Dimensions Status Indication LED yellow
Rated frequency –
Output each relay
Contact type 2 × 1 NO contact
PIN assignment
Contact material AgSnO2
+A11 14 Mechanical service life > 5 x 106 opertions
-A 1 2 13 >5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
+A21 24 300 V
50178)
General
-A 2 2 23 Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Limit curve Insulation voltage input/output 4.0 kVeff
Safe isolation yes
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Comments
1.55
·
DC Solid State Relay, 3 wire, plus switching

Switching element DC 30 V; 5 A; 10 A
Screw-/Spring terminal

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V / 5 A 760105 OT 6-0105 DC 24 V 2
DC 24 V / 10 A 760708 OT 6-0708 DC 24 V 2
short circuit-proof
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V / 5 A 761105 OT 6-1105 DC 24 V 2
DC 24 V / 10 A 761708 OT 6-1708 DC 24 V 2
short circuit-proof
Input DC 24 V / 5 A DC 24 V / 10 A short circuit-proof

Rated current 18.0 mA 22.0 mA
Protection device Bridge rectifier Reverse diode, Suppressor diode
Dimensions
Status Indication LED yellow, green and status output S
LED yellow "on" at I > 2 A, (status output on = UA1,
max. 0.5 A)
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Transistor, short circuit-proof
Max. switching current DC 5 A (Derating) DC 10 A (Derating)
Inrush current – 120 A (10 ms)
PIN assignment Leakage current <20 µA
Switch-on delay 260 µs 0.1 ms
DC 24 V / 5 A
Switch-off delay 3.5 ms 0.4 ms
Switching frequency <500 Hz <50 Hz
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Supressor diode
General
DC 24 V / 10 A short circuit-proof Protection class IP 20
A1 +13 Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
ye
+13 Insulation voltage input/output 4.0 kVeff
24VDC
A2
Safe isolation yes
14
A2 Operation temperature range -25 °C – 70 °C
gn
0V
S
Derating Approvals –
DC 24 V / 5 A Termination Screw-/spring terminal 0.25–2.5 mm2
Labels for laser printer 681033 LEB-0615 1
6,35x15,24mm
(Sheet with 528 labels)
DC 24 V / 10 A short circuit-proof
1.56
·

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
spring terminal, contact material: AgSnO2

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input AC/DC 24 V
50 V
50178)
Output
PIN assignment Contact material AgSnO2
ÿÿ Mechanical service life 2 x 107 operations
ÿÿ Switch-on delay 8 ms
ÿÿ ÿÿ Switch-off delay 15 ms
ÿÿ Clearance/creep. dist.
>5.5 mm
ÿÿ (contol/load side)
ÿÿ
ÿÿ Rated insulation voltage (EN
ÿÿ 250 V
ÿÿ 50178)
ÿÿ Inrush current 16 A (4 ms)
ÿÿ General
Limit curve Protection class IP 20
Safe isolation Yes
Approvals –
Laser printer label 6.35×15.24 mm 681033 LEB-0615 1
(sheet with 528 labels)
1.57
·
AC/DC relay interface, 2 relays each with 1 changeover contact and 1 NO contact/2 changeover contacts
AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA
screw terminal, contact material: AgNi 90/10

2 change over- / 2 normaly open contact
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 760752 RE 6-0752 AC/DC 24 V 2W/2S 5
2 x 2 change over contact
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 760753 RE 6-0753 AC/DC 24 V 2/2W 5
Input 760752 760753

Interrupting voltage –
320 V
50178)
Output
Contact type 2 changeover contacts / 2 NO contacts 2 × 2 changeover contacts
Switching capacity AC 15 –A
Switching capacity DC 13 –
Contact material AgNi 90/10
PIN assignment Mechanical service life 3 x 107 operations
760752
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
320 V
50178)
General
760753 Insulation voltage input/output 4.0 kVeff
Safe isolation Yes
Approvals –
Limit curve (sheet with 528 labels)
1.58
·
AC/DC relay interface, 1 relay with positively-driven contacts, 2 NC contacts and 4 NO contacts
AC/DC 250V, 6A, 1500 VA
Screw/spring terminal, contact material: AgCuNi+ 0.2 µm HV

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 762192 LRZK 6S-D024-240H 1
DC 120 V 762193 LRZK 6S-D110-240H 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 762189 LRZK 6F-D024-240H 1
DC 120 V 762190 LRZK 6F-D110-240H 1
Input DC 24 V DC 120 V
Input voltage range 16.8 V – 30.0 V 77.0 V – 137.5 V
Interrupting voltage <2.4 V <11 V
50 V 160 V
Dimensions 50178)
Rated frequency –
Output
Contact type 2 NC/4 NO contacts, positively driven in acc. with EN 50205, application type A
Switching capacity AC 15 230 V: 3 A A
PIN assignment Switching capacity DC 13 24 V: 5 A, 0.1 Hz, 110 V: 0.3 A
Contact material AgCuNi+ 0.2µm HV
Mechanical service life 2 x 107 operations
Limit curve Switch-off delay 10 ms
>3.2 mm
(contol/load side)
320 V
50178)
General
Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ
Safe isolation Yes yes
Approvals cULus
Termination Screw terminal: 0.08–2.5 mm2 –
1.59
·
AC/DC Relay-Module,1 Relay with 2 CO- / 2 NO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA

Screw terminal
Input AC/DC 24 V
50 V
50178)
Dimensions Output
Contact type 2 changeover contacts / 2 NO contacts
PIN assignment Switch-off delay 15 ms
2.2 mm
(contol/load side)
320 V
50178)
Inrush current –
General
Safe isolation No
Approvals –
1.60
Notes
1.61
Minicompact Series
Minicompact Interface Fits anywhere User-friendly

The miniature interface between • Minicompact – the universal solution where • Integrated interference protection for relay
the controller and plant peripherals! space is tight. and solid state relay interfaces.
• Relay interface • Standard plastic description plates.
• Solid state relays
State-of-the-art interface technology specially

for use in distributed junction boxes!
Safety
• Relays and solid state relays with
safeisolation to DIN EN 50178 (VDE 0160)
• High-grade screw and spring termination

technique
1.62
Minicompact Series
LÜTZE Minicompact Standard
Universally usable relay and solid state relay interfaces in various widths, with conventional and screw or spring type termination.
LÜTZE Microcompact Standard LÜTZE Microcompact – Custom
Universally usable relay and solid state Whether for custom colours or specially
relay interfaces, multi-channel, with developed products – talk to us!
conventional termination technique,
with screw or spring.
Increased requirements Global application LÜTZE Microcompact Accessories
Relays and solid state relays specially Thanks to approvals including UL and GL, Standard plastic description plates size
for increased requirements such as rail global use in a wide variety of applications 7x20 mm allow easy labelling.
engineering or other applications with is possible.
similar requirements.
1.63
·
AC/DC Relay-Module, 1 Relay with 1 N/O contact

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
Screw terminal, Contact material: AgSnO2 + 0.15 µm HV

Relay Module with AgSnO2
AC/DC 230 V 730717 RE 4-0717 AC/DC 230 V 5
Relay Module with AgNi + 0.15µm HV
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V HV 730841 RE 4-0841 HTV AC/DC 24 V 5
Input AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V HV AC/DC 230 V

50 V 250 V
50178)
Output
Contact type 1 NO contact
Min. switching voltage AC/DC 17 V AC/DC 1 V AC/DC 17 V
Min. switching current AC/DC 5 mA AC/DC 1 mA AC/DC 5 mA
AC/DC 24 V, AC/DC 24 V HV Contact material AgSnO2 AgNi + 0.15 µm HV AgSnO2
Mechanical service life 3 × 107 operations
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿÿ Switch-off delay 4 ms 3 ms 4 ms
>5.5 mm
(control/load side)
AC/DC 230 V Rated insulation voltage (EN
300 V
ÿÿ 50178)
ÿÿ Inrush current 15 A (4 ms)
ÿÿ General
ÿÿ Housing material PPE
Limit curve
Safe isolation Yes
Approvals cULus,
cULus
VW approval
Comments
contact.
1.64
·
DC Solid State Relay, 2 wire

Switching element DC 60 V, 1.5 A
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Input DC 24 V
Protection device Reverse diode
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Transistor, N/O contact
Inrush current DC 4 A (0.2 s)
Leakage current <0.1 mA
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
Safe isolation yes
Derating
Approvals cULus
Labels for laser printer 6,35x15,24 681033 LEB-0615 1
mm (Sheet with 528 labels)
1.65
·
DC Solid State Relay, 2 wire

Switching element AC 250 V, 1.5 A, zero-voltage switching
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Input DC 24 V
Protection device Reverse diode
Rated frequency –
Output
Switching element Triac, N/O contact
Dimensions Max. switching voltage AC 250 V
Max. switching current AC 1.5 A (Derating)
Inrush current AC 30 A (1 s)
Leakage current <5 mA
>8.0 mm
(contol/load side)
Protection device output Varistor
Derating Safe isolation yes
Approvals –
Labels for laser printer 6,35x15,24 681033 LEB-0615 1
mm (Sheet with 528 labels)
1.66
·

AC/DC 250 V, 6 A, 1500 VA

Screw terminal
Input AC/DC 24 V
50 V
50178)
Dimensions Output
Contact material AgNi + 0.15 µm HV
PIN assignment >5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
250 V
50178)
General
Safe isolation Yes
Limit curve Operation temperature range -25 °C – 60 °C
Storage temperature range 40 °C – 80 °C
Approvals cULus
Comments
contact.
1.67
·

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
Screw terminal, Contact material: AgSnO2, AgNi + 0.15 µm HV

AgSnO2
AC/DC 230 V 731737 RE 4-7137 AC/DC 230 V 5
AgNi + 0.15 µm HV
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V HV 730842 RE 4-0842 HTV AC/DC 24 V 5
Input AC/DC 24 V HV AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 230 V

50 V 250 V
50178)
Output
Min. switching voltage AC/DC 1 V AC/DC 17 V
Min. switching current AC/DC 1 mA AC/DC 5 mA
AC/DC 24 V HV, AC/DC 24 V Contact material AgNi + 0.15 µm HV AgSnO2
Mechanical service life 2 × 107 operations 3 x 107 operations
Switch-on delay 7 ms 8 ms
>5.5 mm
(contol/load side)
AC/DC 230 V Rated insulation voltage (EN
300 V
50178)
General
Safe isolation Yes
Approvals cULus
1.68
·

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA

AgNi 90/10
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 730741 RE-4-0741 AC/DC 24 V 5
Input AC/DC 24 V
50 V
50178)
Dimensions Output
PIN assignment
2 mm
(contol/load side)
300 V
50178)
General
Limit curve Housing material PPE
Safe isolation No
Approvals –
1.69
·
DC Relay-Module, 1 Relay with positively driven contact, 1 NC and 1 NO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
Screw terminal, contact material AgSnO2 + 0.2 µm HV

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 730854 LRZK 4S-D024-110H 5
DC 110 V 730855 LRZK 4S-D110-110H 5
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 731854 LRZK 4F-D024-110H 5
DC 110 V 731855 LRZK 4F-D110-110H 5
Input DC 24 V DC 110 V
Input voltage range 16.8 V – 30.0 V 77.0 V – 137.5 V
50 V 160 V
Dimensions 50178)
Rated frequency –
Output
Contact type 1 NC/1 NO contact, positively driven in acc. with EN 50205, application type A
Min. switching current AC/DC 5 A
PIN assignment
Switching capacity AC 15 230 V: 3 A A
Switching capacity DC 13 24 V: 5 A, 0.1 Hz, 110 V: 0.3 A
Contact material AgSnO2+ 0.2 µm HV
Limit curve Switch-off delay 10 ms
>3.2 mm
(contol/load side)
Reliability – B10d value DC 13 630,000 switching cycles (duty ratio 1:9, switching frequency 360/h, according to
IEC 61810-2)
Reliability – B10d value AC 15 1,410,000 switching cycles (duty ratio 1:9, switching frequency 360/h, according to
IEC 61810-2)
250 V
50178)
General
Safe isolation yes
Approvals cULus
Termination Screw terminal: 0.08–2.5 mm2 –
Labels for laser printer 9 x 20 mm 681032 LEB-0924 1
(Sheet with 270 labels)
1.70
Notes
1.71
Variocompact Series
Variocompact Interface
The open, low-cost interface family
• Relay interface
• Surge relay interface
• Custom products
1.72
·
AC/DC Relay-Interface,2 CO contact

AC/DC 250 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
screw terminal, contact material: AgNi + 0.15 µm HV

AgNi (relay soldered)
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 710755 RPE-1E2/2W DC 24 V 5
AgNi (relay connected)
AgNi + 0.15 µm HV
Nominal voltage DC 24 V HV 711755 RPE-1E2/2W HTV DC 24 V 5
Input 710755 710763 711755

50 V
50178)
Rated frequency –
Output
Min. switching voltage AC/DC 17 V AC/DC 1 V
Min. switching current AC/DC 5 mA AC/DC 1 mA
Contact material AgNi AgNi + 0.15 µm HV
PIN assignment Mechanical service life 2 x 107 operations
ÿÿ Switch-on delay 8 ms 10 ms
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
–
ÿÿ (control/load side)
ÿÿ Rated insulation voltage (EN
ÿÿ 300 V
50178)
ÿÿ Inrush current 7 A (4 ms) 7A 15 A (4 ms)
General
ÿÿ
DC 24 V
Safe isolation –
Approvals –
Comments
DC 24 V HV contact.
1.73
2. Signal Isolation Converters
Signal Conversion
Industrial Signal Isolation

Transformers Contents
In instrumentation and control technology, analogue signals can be
corrupted by external interference. Lütze Microcompact and LCON Product Overview
isolation transformers prevent signal corruption.
Microcompact Series Basics: Converter Technology

• Single or multi-function converters
• DIP switch configurable
Microcompact 6.2 mm
• 2- and 3-way isolation
• High insulation voltage of 2.5kV or 4kV Analogue
• Wide-range supply voltage Temperature
• High accuracy
• Universally usable, so cut storage costs Potentiometer
• UL and Class 1 Div.2, A,B,C,D, T4 Passive converter
• Screw and spring type termination
Microcompact 17.5 mm
LCON Series Analogue
• Multi-function converters Temperature
• DIP switch and software configurable
• FDT/DTM Frequency
• Custom sizes freely configurable
LCON - Software configurable converters
• 3‐ and 4-way isolation
• High insulation voltage of 2.5 kV Analogue
• High accuracy Temperature
• Universally usable, so cut storage costs
• UL and Class 1 Div.2, A,B,C,D, T4 Analog & limit value
• Screw and spring type termination Temperature & limit value
Limit value - Analogue
Limit value - Temperature
Minicompact
Analogue
2.1
Signal Isolation Transformers · Product Overview
Microcompact 6.2 mm
Special signal/ Standard signal/ Current/ Voltage/ Temperature Temperature

Standard signal Standard signal Standard signal Standard signal PT100/ PT1000/
Standard signal Standard signal
Microcompact 17.5 mm
Standard signal/ Voltage signal-/ Temperature- Temperature- Frequency/

Standard signal Standard signal PT100-/ Thermocouple. J/K Standard signal
LCON - Multi-function and Software Configurable
Standard-, I-,U-, PT-, Thermo-, Poti- Standard, I,U, PT-, Thermo-, Potentio- PT, Thermo, Potentio- PT-, Thermo-, Poti-
Special signal/ Special, R-signal/ Special signal/ meter, Special, R-signal/ meter, Special, Sonder-, R-Signal/
Standard signal Standard signal Standard & limit value Standard & limit value R-signal/Limit value Limit value
2.2
Signal Isolation Transformers · Product Overview
Temperature Temperature Passive converter

Thermocouple J/ Thermocouple K/ 1-/2-channel
Page 2.26 Page 2.28 Page 2.31
1x standard signal/
2x standard signal
Page 2.44
2.3
Signal Isolation Transformers · Basics
General description of converters Transmitters General technical information
Converters are needed in a wide variety of These kinds of converter transform input Input protection
areas in industry in order to perform the signals into other physical quantities.
following basic tasks: Describes the protection measures taken and
The following lists some examples: indicates the maximum possible input signal.
1. Signal conversion
2. Signal amplification Input signal Output signal Suppressor diodes are mostly used to limit
3. Signal isolation voltage and PTC resistors to limit current.
Voltage Current/Frequency
4. Signal filtering
Current Voltage/Frequency
Input resistance
A converter is normally constructed as shown Frequency Voltage/Current
in the following schematic: To ensure low load on the input signal,
Various input signals in analog or digital form, current inputs are always executed as
as are outputted by pulsers, thermocouples low-resistance and voltage inputs as high-
Input
Converter
Output or resistance pick-ups for example, are resistance:
signal signal converted in the transmitters into the desired
standardised outputs. I: <100 Ω; U:> 10kΩ
Supply
Standard signals (unit signals) Voltage drop
Figure : Schematic of a converter
Unit signals are standardised electrical This relates to passive converters. The
Input signals may be: signals in process automation. voltage drop is dependent on the load
impedance and on the device’s own power
• Voltages Commonly used unit signals include current demand. For the applicable values refer to
• Currents signals to DIN IEC 60381-1: the relevant data sheets.
• Frequencies
• Other adapted physical quantities • 0 to 20 mA True RMS measurement
(e.g. pressure, temperature, humidity,
PH values, etc.). • 4 mA to 20 mA (live zero) The RMS (root mean square) value indicates
the value of a direct current or voltage which
Output signals may be: and voltage signals to converts the same electrical energy - so
DIN IEC 60381-2: also on average over time the same
• Voltages electrical power - on an ohmic converter in a
• Currents • 0 to 10 V representative period of time. The RMS value
• Frequencies depends on the peak value and on the curve
• Signals for field bus interfaces • 2 V to 10 V (live zero) form. Lütze current or voltage converters
offer true RMS measurement as standard, so
A further distinction is made between analog Live-zero signals are used in almost all non-sinusoidal input quantities can also be
and digital signals, which may be both input industrial applications. If the start of the correctly measured.
and output signals. measuring range is assigned an electrical
signal other than 0 (zero), a wire break Zero/Span
The input signals must be converted from monitor can be implemented. The non-zero
the required output signals. In this context initial signal is also termed “live zero“. A 0 mA On conventional devices a zero/span
conversion means: signal is thus always a reliable indicator of balance must be carried out. This is done
a fault. by means of two separate potentiometers.
• Actual conversion of signals (e.g. from Vibration, temperature and other influences
voltage into current) Current signals are preferred over voltage alter the set values, so periodically a
signals because the current signal is immune recalibration is required.
• Amplification of signals (e.g. from low-level to electromagnetic interference (switch-on of Zero-balancing adjusts the zero setting of the
signals to standard signals) adjacent consumers) and voltage losses due output relative to the input. The output signal
to the line resistance. is amplified relative to the input signal by way
• Electrical isolation and where appropriate The maximum length of the signal line is of the span balance.
amplification of signals (e.g. of analog- limited only by the maximum load impedance This balancing must also be carried out
signals) which can be operated by the current source. when the range is changed, such as by DIP
The 4 mA… 20 mA unit of current signal switches.
• Filtering of interference (e.g. of HF offers the additional major advantage that the
interference from analog signals) signal circuit is continuously powered. That Lütze converters feature automatic,
power can be used by transmitters for their non-temperature-dependent balancing.
The supply feeds power to the converter. own supply. In this case the PLC must power Recalibration is not necessary, even in the
It is required as additional auxiliary power to the signal circuit (passive sensor). An active event of a range change.
implement active isolation. sensor needs an external power supply for its
own demand. Load impedance
The load impedance indicates the load

capacity of the converter.
2.4
400 Ω to 750 Ω. The values for voltage outputs Ambient-temperature range In sequenced measuring circuits potential
are in the range from 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ. differences occur due to earth loops.
The values specified by Lütze relate to a Interconnecting multiple measuring circuits
Wire break and short-circuit 100% duty cycle. Normally condensation is increases the reference voltage with possibly
ruled out. For devices which allow condensa- fatal consequences for the data transfer.
As already described under "Standard tion, the fact will be indicated on the "Relative
signals", a wire break can be detected by humidity" line or it will be stipulated that the
way of a live-zero signal. In monitoring of device in question conforms to EN 50155.
connected sensors (such as temperature),
monitoring for wire break or short-circuit is Basics of transmission interference
UV
effected by an internal electronics unit. Such RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
faults can be indicated in different ways: Interference on signal transmission
• LED Error-free, undisturbed, secure signal ∆ UR4 ∆ UR3 ∆ UR2 ∆ UR1

• Defined output signal transmission is vital to the reliable control
• Separate output of processes. Analog signals transmitted Potential differences due to chassis loops
between the control side (PLC or instrumen-
Linearity error tation and control system) and the
sensors/actuators are almost always subject A/A modules are a simple means of bypass-
Linearity error refers to a deviation from the to ing this interference. They electrically isolate
ideal transmission accuracy without zero/span external interference. There is considerable the signal input and output, decoupling the
errors. The figure is given as a percentage. potential for interference especially given measuring circuits. As well as isolating the
the rough industrial environment and long signal, this also filters out interference. The
Accuracy (FSR) transmission distances. signals are amplified for longer transmission
distances and adapted to the desired output
The value indicates the deviation of the Electromagnetic interference quantities for the evaluation electronics.
output signal relative to the input signal. For optimum functional reliability, as well as
The figure is always given as a percentage The best known and most widespread the converters shielded cable with twisted-
referred to the maximum signal output value, interference is that caused by capacitive and pair wires should additionally be used.
e.g. 10V (full scale range) at room tempera- inductive effects. In these also cross-cable
ture (23°C). The linearity error is built-in to coupling processes overvoltages may occur
this value. which, for example, can destroy input/output
modules of a PLC or an industrial computer. Isolation techniques
Temperature coefficient To protect those expensive downstream
components, it is advisable to use A/A There are various way of isolating potential.
Describes the deviating accuracy dependent modules. They ensure a defined transition
on the ambient temperature. The figure is from peripherals and evaluation electronics.
normally given in ppm/K (parts per
million/Kelvin).
Example:
30 ppm/K corresponds to 0.003 %/K
Transmission error
kV
The total deviation of the output signal from 0-10 V
RE
the input signal is the sum of the accuracy +
temperature coefficient.
Figure: Electromagnetic interference Diagram: Isolation techniques
Transfer frequency
Potential differences Active isolation
DC signals are normally transmitted.
Signal changes demand a dynamic response Potential differences occur as a result of earth An additional supply voltage is required for all
however. The transmission frequency indi- or chassis loops. If signal transmitters and kinds of active isolation.
cates the frequency up to which alternating receivers refer to the earth potential - i.e. the
current or voltage can also be transmitted. earth is used as a return conductor in signal 3-way disconnection
transmission - this is known as an earth loop.
Rise time (10-90 %) As the distance between the transmitter and A characteristic feature of 3-way isolation is
receiver increases, the earth resistance complete insulation of all the components
The response time of the output signal to a increases as the line gets longer. As a result from each other, so protecting against mutual
change in the input signal from 10% to 90% voltage differences of as much as 200 V can interference.
of the nominal value. occur.
Settling time
The time taken by the output to reach a value

with an inaccuracy of 1%. This value already
takes account of the rise time.
RERDE
∆U
Potential differences due to earth loops Diagram: 3-way isolation
2.5
The input, output and supply - and thus also
all equipment connected to them - are
mutually electrically isolated. In this way the
input and output circuits are decoupled from
the supply and the input and output circuits
are decoupled from each other. The input
signals must be active signals. The output
signal is an amplified filtered signal.
Figure: 2-way supply isolation

2-way isolation: Input isolation
By this isolation method, equipment connect-
In this form of isolation the input is electrical ed to the output can be effectively protected
isolated from the output and the supply, which against interference and the auxiliary power
are both connected to the same potential. described above is additionally provided. The
output signal is an amplified filtered signal.
Passive isolation
In contrast to active isolation, no additional

supply voltage is required for passive
isolation. The power required for electrical
isolation and signal transmission is drawn
from the input circuit. A minor voltage drop
at the input of the isolation module is used
Figure: 2-way input isolation for this. The input measurement signal is
burdened with this voltage drop. The
By this isolation method equipment connected responding current for the function of the
to the output can be effectively protected modules is just a few Amperes. The resultant
against interference. The input signals must transmission error is negligible. By this
be active signals. The output signal is an isolation method no signal amplification is
amplified filtered signal. possible. Also, these isolation modules do not
operation reaction-free. This means that
every load on the output places an equal load
2-way isolation: Output isolation on the input signal. Isolation modules without
auxiliary power transmit unipolar current
In this form of isolation the output is signals at a ratio of 1:1. The possible load
electrically isolated from the input and the impedance voltage at the output is lower than
supply, which are both connected to the same the load capacity of the input signal by the
potential. amount of voltage drop at the input in the
event of an output short-circuit (own voltage
demand).
Figure: 2-way output isolation
By this isolation method, equipment Figure: Passive isolation, supply input

connected to the input can be effectively
protected against interference. The input By this isolation method, earth loops can be
signals must be active signals. The output isolated and signals filtered for example. The
signal is an amplified filtered signal. input signals must be active current signals.
The output signal is likewise a current signal.
2-way isolation: Supply isolation
In this form of isolation an additional supply is

provided at the input. This auxiliary power is
used to operate passive sensors connected
on the input side. The structure of this
isolation method is identical to that of input
isolation. The supply and output are again
connected to the same potential.
2.6
Open FDT Technology
FDT technology, what is it?

FDT standardizes the communication and configuration interface between all field devi-
ces and host systems. FDT provides a common environment for accessing the devices’
most sophisticated features. Any device can be configured, operated, and maintained
through the standardized user interface – regardless of supplier, type or communication
protocol.
The FDT interface – Integration standard

The FDT interface is the specification describing the standardized data exchange bet-
ween devices and control system or engineering or asset management tools.
DTM – Device driver

DTMs are classified into two categories:
• Device DTMs which connect to the field device configuration components
• CommDTMs which connect to the software communication components.
The DTM provides a unified structure for accessing device parameters, configuring and
operating the devices, and diagnosing problems. DTMs can range from a simple
Graphical User Interface for setting device parameters to a highly sophisticated applicati-
on capable of performing complex real-time calculations for diagnosis and maintenance
purposes.
DeviceDTM
Provided by the device manufacturer
Represents the whole logic and parameters of a device
Standardized interface to the FDT Frame Application
Can be used in any FDT Frame Application
DTM Style Guide
CommDTM
Represents communication components like PC communication cards, couplers,
gateways, remote I/Os, and linking devices.
FDT Frame Application – Host system

The Frame Application is a software program that implements Device DTMs and
CommDTMs. The Frame Application provides:
• Common environment
• User Management
• DTM Management
• Data Management
• Network Configuration
• Navigation
2.7
Open FDT Technology
Example to implement Lütze DTM´s into
1. Add device 2. Select the communication channel
3. Again, add device 4. Select needed Lütze DTM
5. Device is displayed 6. Double clic on the device open the list of parameter
2.8
Notes
2.9
Compact, flexible, safe: The new
Signal Microcompact Converter of
Save space
6,2 mm width offer highest
building density
For extreme applications

New applications via extended
Temperature range of -25°C…+70°C
Fast response
Via 1ms response time is it
also possible to transmit AC signals!
High load impedance

All current outputs are qualified
for 750 Ohm loads!
Safety isolation
All devices offer „Safety isolation“
with 2,5kV-isolation voltage acc. EN 61140
Easy installation
Jumper combs instead of wiring via complete
isolated jumper combs in all termination levels
ew intelligent
f the LCON series
Leading, open technology

The parametrization via FDT software is the
leading technology for engineering, Management
& Life Cycle Support in automation applications
Worldwide using - Class I Div 2

Each LÜTZE signal converter can be used
worldwide because of excisting approvals
Quality not only in function

Each LÜTZE signal converter offer UL 94-V0
and NFF 12, F2
Free selection
Screw or spring termination fullfill all
customer requirements
Power bridging
Bridge every potential with
isolated jumper bars
·
Input: potentiometer, 2-conductor

Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA
Isolation: 1.5 kV, 3-way isolation

Screw terminal
0–1 kΩ 750557 WPOA 7-0557 1
0–6 kΩ 750558 WPOA 7-0558 1
Input 750557 750558

Input signal Potentiometer 0–1 kΩ, 2-conductor Potentiometer 0–6 kΩ, 2-conductor
Galvanic isolation I/O 3-way isolation
Zero /Span Production comparison
Transmission frequency 10 Hz at 3 dB
Input characteristic impedance 1 MΩ
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Max. load impedance at I-output – 400 Ω
Max. load impedance at U-output >1 kΩ –
Dimensions Load impedance 55 Ω –
Output current max. 21 mA –
Output signal Adjustable via switch
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Operation voltage range DC: 16,8–30 V, AC: 19,2–28,8 V
Status Indication LED flashes in the event of wire breakage and output will saturate.
Input/output protection Overvoltage AC/DC 30 V, Output short circuit-proof
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR (23 °C)
Linearity error 0.10 %
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 60 ms
PIN assignment Transmission frequency –
Temperature coefficient 150 ppm / K FSR
Range adjustment Installation postition Optional
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.12
·
Input: potentiometer, 3-conductor

Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA
Isolation: 2.5 kV, 3-way isolation

Screw terminal
500 Ω–50 kΩ 750559 WPOA 7-0559 1
Input 750559
Input signal Potentiometer 500 Ω – 50 kΩ, 3-conductor
Reference voltage 2.5 V
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Load impedance 55 Ω –
Dimensions Output current max. 21 mA –
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Nominal voltage DC 24 V
Operation voltage range DC: 16.8–30 V
Status Indication LED flashes in the event of wire breakage and output will saturate.
Linearity error 500 Ω – 25 kΩ: 0.1 % FSR (23 °C), 25 kΩ – 50 kΩ: 0.2 % FSR (23 °C)
PIN assignment
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
Transmission frequency –
Range adjustment Insulation voltage input/output 2.5 kVeff
Installation postition Optional
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.13
·
Input: 0–60 mV
Output: 0–10 V
Insulation: 1.5 kV, 3-way isolation

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 750901 WAA 7-0901 1
Input 0–60 mV
Input signal 0–60 mV
Input characteristic impedance 330 kΩ
Output 0 – 10 V
Output signal 0 – 10 V
Max. load impedance at I-output –
Max. load impedance at U-output >1 kΩ
Dimensions Load impedance 55 Ω
Output current max. 21 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Operation voltage range DC: 16.8–30 V; AC: 19.2–28.8 V
Input/output protection Overvoltage AC/DC 30 V, PTC fuse, Output short circuit-proof
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
Transmission frequency <30 Hz
PIN assignment Temperature coefficient <150 ppm / K FSR
Approvals cULus, Class I Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Tag holder 4×11 mm white 681313 BZT 0411 100
2.14
·
Input: 0–10 V
Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA

Screw terminal
Input/output 0-10 V/0-10 V 750530 WAA 7-0530 1
0-10 V/0-20 mA 750531 WAA 7-0531 1
0-10 V/4-20 mA 750532 WAA 7-0532 1
Spring terminal
Input/output 0-10 V/0-10 V 751530 WAA 7-1530 1
0-10 V/0-20 mA 751531 WAA 7-1531 1
0-10 V/4-20 mA 751532 WAA 7-1532 1
Input 0/10 V
Input signal 0/10 V
Dimensions Transmission frequency 30 Hz at 3 dB
Output 750530/751530 750531/751531 750532/751532
Output signal 0 – 10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment Input/output protection Overvoltage AC/DC 30 V, Output short circuit-proof
75x530 Accuracy 0.1 % FSR (23 °C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
Temperature coefficient <150 ppm / K FSR
75x531, 75x532 Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Termination Screw-/spring terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2
Approvals cULus, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4A
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.15
·
Input: 0–20 mA
Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA
Insulation: 1.5 kV; 3-way isolation

Screw terminal
Input/output 0-20 mA/0-10 V 750533 WAA 7-0533 1
0-20 mA/0-20 mA 750534 WAA 7-0534 1
0-20 mA/4-20 mA 750535 WAA 7-0535 1
Spring terminal
0-20 mA/0-20 mA 751534 WAA 7-1534 1
0-20 mA/4-20 mA 751535 WAA 7-1535 1
Input 0–20 mA
Input signal 0–20 mA
Input characteristic impedance 100 Ω
Output 750533/751533 750534/751534 750535/751535
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, current input with PTC, short circuit-proof output
75x533 Accuracy 0.1 % FSR (23 °C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.16
·
Input: 4–20 mA
Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA

Screw terminal
4-20 mA/0-20 mA 750537 WAA 7-0537 1
4-20 mA/4-20 mA 750538 WAA 7-0538 1
Spring terminal
4-20 mA/0-20 mA 751537 WAA 7-1537 1
4-20 mA/4-20 mA 751538 WAA 7-1538 1
Input 4–20 mA
Input signal 4–20 mA
Input characteristic impedance 100 Ω
Output 750536/751536 750537/751537 750538/751538
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, current input with PTC, short circuit-proof output
750x536 Accuracy 0.1 % FSR (23 °C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
Transmission frequency < 30 Hz
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.17
·
Input: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA, adjustable

Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA, adjustable

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 750539 WNAA 7-0539 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 751539 WNAA 7-1539 1
Input 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

Input resistance 330 kΩ 100 Ω
Input signal 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, adjustable via switch
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Dimensions Max. load impedance at U-output >1 kΩ –
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, current input with PTC, short circuit-proof output
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
PIN assignment Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 30 ms
Range adjustment Termination Screw-/spring terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.18
·
Input: AC/DC 0–1 A / 0–5 A


Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V, 0–1 A 750540 WAA 7-0540 1
DC 24 V, 0–5 A 750541 WAA 7-0541 1
DC 24 V, 0–10 A 750542 WAA 7-0542 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V, 0–1 A 751540 WAA 7-1540 1
DC 24 V, 0–5 A 751541 WAA 7-1541 1
DC 24 V, 0–10 A 751542 WAA 7-1542 1
Input 750540/751540 750541/751541 750542/751542

Input signal AC/DC 0 – 1 A, ± 1 A AC/DC 0 – 5 A, ± 5 A AC/DC 0 – 10 A, + 10 A
Input characteristic impedance typ. 0.06 Ω typ. 0.02 Ω typ. 0,01 Ω
Dimensions Zero /Span Production comparison
Line frequency 15 – 400 Hz
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple typ. <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment
7 4 Operation voltage range DC: 16.8–30 V
IN I U,I OUT+
8 3
IN OUT-
_ 1 + 2
Input/output protection –
DC 24V
Range adjustment Linearity error 0.10 %, FSR (23°C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) –
Switch On S1
Input Output 1 2 3 4
0-1A 0-10V
0-1A 0-20mA Temperature coefficient <150 ppm / K FSR
0-1A 4-20mA Insulation voltage input/output 2.5 kVeff
Switch On S1 Protection class IP 20
Input Output 1 2 3 4 Installation postition Optional
0-5A 0-10V Termination Screw-/spring terminal 0.14–1.5 mm2
0-5A 0-20mA Operation temperature range -25 °C – 60 °C
0-5A 4-20mA
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.19
·
Input: AC/DC 0–300 V

Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750927 WAA 7-0927 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751927 WAA 7-1927 1
Input AC/DC 0–300 V

Input signal AC/DC 0–300 V
Transmission frequency 6 kHz at 3 dB
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Status Indication LED yellow, flashes in the event of wire breakage and output will saturate
Input/output protection Varistor/short circuit-proof output
PIN assignment
Linearity error 0.10 %, FSR (23°C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Range adjustment Transmission frequency –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.20
·
Input: PT100, 2-conductor – with adjustable temperature range from - 50 °C to + 200 °C


Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 750809 WPT 7-0809 1
Spring terminal
Input PT 100
Measurement input PT100, 2-wire, offset correction
Temperature range -50–150 °C / 0–100 °C / 0–200 °C – adjustable via switch
Transmission frequency 10 Hz
Input resistance 1 MΩ
Sensor current 0.5 mA
Dimensions Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Status Indication LED yellow, blinks for wire break and output goes to a saturated state
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR
PIN assignment Linearity error 0.1 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Error coefficient of measuring line 2.7 K/Ω
Range adjustment Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Standards EN 60721-3-3, EN 55011, EN 61000-4-2/6, EN 50178, contamination level 2, Over
voltage category III
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.21
·


Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input PT 100
Measurement input PT100, 3-wire
Input resistance 240 kΩ
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Error coefficient of measuring line 0.1 K + 0.1 %/Ω
Range adjustment Temperature coefficient 150 ppm / K FSR
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.22
·


Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input PT 100
Temperature range 0–50 °C / 0–100 °C / 0–200 °C – adjustable via switch
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
3 Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 60 ms
Range adjustment
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.23
·
Input: PT100, 2/3/4-conductor – with adjustable temperature range from - 50 °C to +200 °C

Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750829 WPT 7-0829 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751829 WPT 7-1829 1
Input PT 100
Measurement input PT100 2/3/4-conductor – adjustable via switch
Input resistance 1 MΩ with 2-conductor, 240 kΩ with 3 and 4-conductor
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Dimensions Max. load impedance at I-output – 400 Ω
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment
Input/output protection DC 30 V overvoltage, short circuit-proof output
Linearity error 0.10 %, FSR (23°C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Range adjustment Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 60 ms
Error coefficient of measuring line 2.7 K /Ω with 2-conductor, 0.1 K + 0.1%/Ω with 3 and 4-conductor
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.24
·
Input: PT1000, 3-conductor – with adjustable temperature range from - 50 °C to +200 °C


Screw terminal
Input PT 1000
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Operation voltage range DC: 16.8–30 V, AC: 19.2–28.8 V
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR
Linearity error 0.1 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
PIN assignment Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 60 ms
Range adjustment Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94 V-0)
Approvals –
Standards EN 60721-3-3; EN 55011, EN 61000-4-2/6, EN 50178, degree of pollution 2, over-
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Labels for laser printer A4 unpun- 681031 LEB - A4 1
ched
2.25
·
Input: Thermocouple Type J – with adjustable temperature range from -50 °C to +600 °C

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 750833 WTH 7-0833 1
Spring terminal
Input J (FeCuNi)
Measurement input Type J (FeCuNi) according to DIN / IEC 584-1
Sensor current – mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Accuracy 0.5 % + 2 K FSR
PIN assignment Linearity error 0.1 % FSR, thermoelectrical potential linear
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Error coefficient of measuring line –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.26
·
Input: Thermocouple Type J – with adjustable temperature range from -50 °C to +600 °C

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input J (FeCuNi)
Measurement input Type J (FeCuNi) according to DIN / IEC 584-1
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.27
·
Input: Thermocouple Type K – with adjustable temperature range from -50 °C to +600 °C
Output: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA , adjustable

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input K (NiCrNi)
Measurement input Type K (NiCrNi) with DIN / IEC 584-1
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Status Indication LED yellow, flashes in the event of wire breakage and output will saturate.
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.28
·
Input: Thermocouple Type K – with adjustable temperature range from -50 °C to +600 °C

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input K (NiCrNi)
Measurement input Type K ( NiCrNi) with DIN / IEC 584-1
Temperature range -50–200°C / 0–400°C / 0–600°C – adjustable via switch
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Status Indication LED yellow, flashes in the event of wire breakage and output will saturate.
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.29
·
Input: 0(4)–20 mA
Output: 0(4)–20 mA
Insulation: 1.5 kV, 2-way isolation passive converter, 1-channel

Screw terminal
750526 WPAA 7-0526 1
Additional circuit 750528 WPAA 7-0528 1
Spring terminal
751526 WPAA 7-1526 1
Input 750526/751526 750528/751528

Input signal 0(4)–20 mA 4–20 mA
Dimensions Output 750526/751526 750528/751528
Output signal 0(4)–20 mA 4–20 mA
Max. load impedance at I-output 1000 Ω (RB)
Burden error <0.06 % from measured value / 100 Ω working resistance
Load impedance –
Ripple <5 mVeff (working resistance 100 Ω)
General 750526/751526 750528/751528
Max. leakage voltage 2.8 V 4.1 V
Nominal voltage passive
Operation voltage range –
Input overload capability max. 35 mA
Status Indication No
PIN assignment Input/output protection Suppressor diode (33 V)
Linearity error –
Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 6 ms (for working resistance 500 Ω and 20 mA)
Temperature drift (working resis-
<100 ppm / K FSR
tance >600R)
<150 ppm / K FSR
tance >600R)
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Comments
With connection: This passive isolator has a non-reactive transmission, so that the current in the input circuit is not interrupted
for an output interruption.
Action chart
2.30
·
Input: 0(4)–20 mA
Output: 0(4)–20 mA
Insulation: 1.5 kV, 2-way isolation passive converter, 2-channel

Screw terminal
750527 WPAA 7-0527 1
Spring terminal
751527 WPAA 7-1527 1
Input 750527/751527 750529/751529

Input signal 2 x 0(4)–20 mA 2 x 4–20 mA
Dimensions Output 750527/751527 750529/751529
Output signal 0(4)–20 mA 2 x 4–20 mA
Max. load impedance at I-output 1000 Ω (RB)
Burden error <0.06 % from measured value / 100 Ω working resistance
Load impedance –
Ripple <5 mVeff (working resistance 100 Ω)
General 750527/751527 750529/751529
Max. leakage voltage 2.8 V 4.1 V
Nominal voltage passive
PIN assignment
Operation voltage range –
Input overload capability max. 35 mA
Status Indication No
Input/output protection Suppressor diode (33 V)
Linearity error –
Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 6 ms (for working resistance 500 Ω and 20 mA)
<100 ppm / K FSR
tance >600R)
<150 ppm / K FSR
tance >600R)
Jumper comb 6A red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Jumper comb 6A white 762803 762806 762813 762823 762833 10
Jumper comb 6A blue 762804 762807 762814 762824 762834 10
Comments
With connection: This passive isolator has a non-reactive transmission, so that the current in the input circuit is not interrupted
for an output interruption.
Action chart
2.31
·
Input: 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA, adjustable

Insulation: 4 kV, 3-way isolation wide range input

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 750510 WNAA 6-0510 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 751510 WNAA 6-1510 1
Input 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

Input signal 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–10 mA, adjustable via switch
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V
Operation voltage range DC: 16.8–264 V, AC: 19.2–264 V
Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, current input with PTC, short circuit-proof output
PIN assignment Accuracy 0.1 % FSR (23 °C)
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
2.32
·
Input: 16 selectable ranges

Insulation: 4 kV, 3-way isolation wide range input

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 750517 WUAA 6-0517 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 751517 WUAA 6-1517 1
Input mV, V mA
Input signal 0–60, 0–100, 0–300, 0–500 mV 0–1, 0–
0–5, 0–10, 0–20, 4–20, ±5, ±20 mA ad-
2, 0–5, 0–10, 0–20, 2–10 V adjustable
justable via DIP switch S1
via switch
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Dimensions
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment Input/output protection Overvoltage AC/DC 30 V; Current input with PTC, Output short circuit-proof
Rise time (10 - 90%) 10 ms
2.33
·
Input: AC/ DC 0–5 A

Output: 4–20 mA
Insulation: 4 kV, 3-way isolation with wide-range input

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 750931 WAA 6-0931 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 751931 WAA 6-1931 1
Input –
Measurement input AC/DC 0–5 A, ±5 A true RMS
Input resistance <0.1 Ω, max. 10 A (30 s)
Output 4–20 mA
Max. load impedance at I-output 400 Ω
Dimensions Max. load impedance at U-output –
Load impedance –
Output current –
Output signal –
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, current input with Varistor, short circuit-proof output
PIN assignment Accuracy < 0.5 % FSR
Linearity error < 0.1 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) –
Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) – ms
Termination Screw/spring terminal: 0.14–2.5 mm2 (with IO 1.5 mm2)
Approvals –
Standards EN 13309, EN 60721-3-3, EN 55011, EN 61000-4-2/6, EN 50178
2.34
·

Insulation: 4 kV, 3-way isolation

Screw terminal
AC/DC 24–240 V 750817 WPT 6-0817 1
Spring terminal
AC/DC 24–240 V 751817 WPT 6-1817 1
Input PT 100
Temperature range -50–50 °C / -50–100 °C / -50–150 °C / 0–100 °C/ 0–150 °C / 0–200 °C /
0–300 °C / 0–400 °C – adjustable via switch
Dimensions Input resistance 240 kΩ
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General 750816/751816 750817/751817
PIN assignment Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 24–240 V
750816 Operation voltage range DC: 16,8–30 V, AC: 19,2–28,8 V DC: 16,8–264 V, AC: 19,2–264 V
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR
Linearity error 0.1 % FSR
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
750817 Build-up time (Accuracy 1%) 60 ms
Range adjustment Installation postition Optional
2.35
·
Input: thermocouples Type J, K – with adjustable temp. range from -50 °C to +1200 °C

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24–240 V 750847 WTH 6-0847 1
Spring terminal
Input J (FeCuNi), K (NiCrNi)

Measurement input J (FeCuNi), K (NiCrNi) according to DIN / IEC 584-1
Temperature range -50–200 °C / -50–350 °C / 0–200 °C / 0–400 °C / 0–600 °C / 0–800 °C / 0–1000
°C / 0–1200 °C – adjustable via switch
Sensor current –
Dimensions Zero /Span Production comparison
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
Operation voltage range DC: 16,8 – 264 V, AC: 19,2 – 264 V
PIN assignment Rated current 10.0 mA
Linearity error 0.1 % FSR, thermoelectrical potential linear
Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Range adjustment Error coefficient of measuring line –
Standards EN 60721-3-3; EN 55011; EN 61000-4-2/6; EN 50178, contamination level 2, Over
2.36
·
Input: Thermocouples Type J, K – temperature range -50 °C...+1200 °C/-210 °C...+1200 °C


Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input J (FeCuNi), K (NiCrNi)

Measurement input J (FeCuNi), K (NiCrNi) according to DIN / IEC 584-1
Temperature range J: -50–150 °C / -50–250 °C / -50–350 °C / 0–400 °C / 0–600 °C / 0–800 °C /
0–1000 °C / 0–1200 °C
K: -210–105 °C / -50–250 °C / -50–350 °C / 0–400 °C / 0–600 °C / 0–800 °C /
0–1000 °C / 0–1200 °C
Dimensions
Sensor current –
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment
Operation voltage range DC: 16.8 – 264 V, AC: 19.2 – 264 V
Linearity error 0.1 % FSR, thermoelectrical potential linear
Range adjustment Rise time (10 - 90%) 30 ms
Temperature coefficient < 150 ppm / K FSR
Approvals –
Standards EN 60721-3-3; EN 55011; EN 61000-4-2/6; EN 50178
2.37
·
Input: Frequency AC und DC Signals, 0–28.8 kHz


Screw terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 750524 WNFA 6-0524 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V 751524 WNFA 6-1524 1
Input 0–28.8 kHz

Input signal 0–100, 0–200, 0–250, 0–400, 0–500, 0–750 Hz
0–1, 0–1,5, 0–2, 0–2,5, 0–3, 0–4, 0–5, 0–6, 0–8 kHz
0–10, 0–12, 0–16, 0–20, 0–24, 0–28,8 kHz
adjustable via switch
Frequency signal AC/DC 0.8–30 V
Hysteresis 0.5 Vss / 5 Vss, can be converted via switch
Dimensions
Hysteresis –
Pulse width min. 10 µs
Output 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Load impedance 55 –
Output voltage –
Ripple <5 mVeff
General
PIN assignment
Input/output protection AC/DC 30 V overvoltage, short circuit-proof output
Range adjustment Ripple approx. 0.1%, range 2...28.8 kHz from 200 Hz
Temperature coefficient 70 ppm / K
Insulation voltage input/output 2.5 kVeff 4.0 kVeff
Termination screw terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2 Spring terminal 0.14–1.5 mm2
Approvals –
2.38
·
Input: ±30 V, ±50 mA, ±DC 5 A adjustable

Output: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V / -10–10 V / 2–10 V / 0–5 V / 1–5 V

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750320 LCON AA DFDT 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751320 LCON AA DFDT 806211 1
Input +30/-30V +50/-50mA DC +5A/-5A

Measurement input +30/-30 V, +50/-50 mA, DC +5 A/-5 A, adjustable via switch and software FDT/
DTM, connection via micro USB
Step response (10–90%) 1.5 ms – 750 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default: filter stage 4 =
200 ms)
Transmission frequency -
Input characteristic impedance > 800 kΩ 30 Ω 10 mΩ
Zero /Span freely adjustable
Dimensions
Output 0 – 10 V -10 – +10 V 0 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Output signal adjustable via switch and software FDT/DTM, connection via USB service cable
Max. load impedance at I-output - 700 Ω
Min. load impedance at U-output >2 kΩ -
Load deviation -
Limitation for exceeding measure-
10.25 V 20.5 mA
ment range
max. Output signal 10.5 V 21 mA
General +30/-30V +50/-50mA +5A/-5A
Operation voltage range 16.8–30 V
PIN assignment Rated current approx. 18 mA
Status Indication LED green, red (error)
Input/output protection Overvoltage DC 30 V, Output short circuit-proof
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR 0.5 % FSR
Linearity error ± 0.05 % FSR ± 0.1 % FSR
2
Termination Screw-/spring terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm
Resolution 16-bit
Temperaturcompensation intern –
Configuration Switch and software: FDT / DTM
Temperature error <100 ppm FSR
Data storage Flash
Range adjustment Weight (kg/piece) 0.050
Approvals cULus, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D T4
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
USB service cable 750894 LCON ZB USB 1
Label holder 4×11mm white 681313 BZT-0411 100
2.39
·
Input: PT, thermocouple, potentiometer – adjustable temperature converter

Output: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V / -10–10 V / 2–10 V / 0–5 V / 1–5 V

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750340 LCON TA DFDT 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751340 LCON TA DFDT 806211 1
Input PT, poti, resistance Thermocouples

Measurement input PT100, PT1000,
Type B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
Potenziometer 0–100 kΩ
customer specific via contact points,
customer specific via contact points,
polynomial
polynomial
Temperature range -220... 850 °C depending on type -210...2310 °C depending on type
Step response (10–90%) TE: 10 – 750 ms, PT: 5 – 750 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default:
200 ms – filter stage 4)
Dimensions Input resistance - 1 MΩ
Sensor current 0.2/0.6 mA type-dependent -
Circuit PT - 2, 3, 4-wire, for 2-conductor with offset adjustment, no external bridges
necessary, autom. detection
Output 0-10 V -10 – +10 V 0 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Output signal adjustable via switch and software FDT/DTM, connection via USB service cable
Max. load impedance at U-output >2 kΩ -
10.25 V 20.5 V
ment range
max. modulation range/output cur-
10.5 V 21 mA
rent
PIN assignment
Ripple -
General PT, poti, resistance Thermocouples
Rated current approx. 18 mA
Status Indication LED green, red (error)
Input/output protection Overvoltage DC 30 V, Output short circuit-proof
Accuracy (10K: set Measurement range(K)) + (10K: set Measurement range(K)) +
0.2% FSR 0.4% FSR
Resolution 16-bit
Linearity error ± 0.1 % FSR
Temperaturcompensation intern - ±1 K typ., max. ±2 K
Configuration Switch and software: FDT / DTM
Temperature error <100 ppm/K
Data storage Flash
Insulation voltage input/output AC 2.5 kVeff
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.40
·
Input: ±30 V, ±50 mA, ±5 A adjustable – adjustable limit value switch

Output: Semiconductor NO contact

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750360 LCON ALS FDT 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751360 LCON ALS FDT 806211 1
Input +30/-30V +50/-50mA +5A/-5A

Measurement input +30/-30 V, +50/-50 mA, DC +5 A/-5 A, adjustable via software FDT/DTM, connec-
tion via micro USB
Step response (10–90%) 4 ms – 750 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default: filter stage 4 = 200
ms)
Input characteristic impedance > 800 kΩ 30 Ω 10 mΩ
Output
Dimensions
Output signal adjustable via software: FDT / DTM, connection via USB service cable
Contact type K1, K2 semiconductor NO contact
Status Indication LED yellow K1 and LED yellow K2, not short-circuit-proof
Operating mode Limit value, window, alarm output / additionally adjustable: Hysteresis,
input / output delay
General +30/-30V +50/-50mA +5A/-5A
PIN assignment Status Indication LED green, yellow (K1, K2), red (error)
Input/output protection Overvoltage DC 30 V
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR 0.5 % FSR
Linearity error ± 0.05 % FSR ± 0.1 % FSR
Resolution 16-bit
Temperaturcompensation intern –
Configuration Software: FDT / DTM
Data storage Flash
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.41
·
Input: PT, thermocouple, potentiometer – adjustable temperature converter

Output: Semiconductor NO contact

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750370 LCON TLS FDT 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751370 LCON TLS FDT 806211 1
Input PT, poti, resistance Thermocouples

Measurement input PT100, PT1000,
Type B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
Potenziometer 0–100 kΩ
customer specific via contact points, po-
customer specific via contact points, po-
lynomial
lynomial
Temperature range -220... 850 °C depending on type -210...2310 °C depending on type
Step response (10–90%) TE: 10 – 750 ms, PT: 5 – 750 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default:
200 ms – filter stage 4)
Dimensions Input characteristic impedance - 1 MΩ
Sensor current 0.2/0.6 mA type-dependent -
Circuit PT - 2, 3, 4-wire, for 2-conductor with
offset adjustment, no external bridges -
necessary, autom. detection
Output
Output signal adjustable via software: FDT / DTM, connection via USB service cable
Contact type K1, K2 semiconductor NO contact
Status Indication LED yellow K1 and LED yellow K2, not short-circuit-proof
Operating mode Limit value, window, alarm output / additionally adjustable: Hysteresis, input / out-
PIN assignment
put delay
General PT, poti, resistance Thermocouples
Status Indication LED green, yellow (K1, K2), red (error)
Accuracy (10K: set Measurement range(K)) + (10K: set Measurement range(K)) +
0.2% FSR 0.4% FSR
Resolution 16-bit
Linearity error ± 0,1 % FSR
Temperaturcompensation intern - ±1 K type., max. ±2 K
Temperature error <100 ppm/K
Data storage Flash
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
2.42
Interface Technology · Microcompact analogue/analogue splitter
Input: 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA adjustable

Output: 2 × 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750321 LCON AASP D 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751321 LCON AASP D 806211 1
Input 0/10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

Measurement input 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, adjustable via switch
Transmission frequency 30 Hz (filter off), 5 Hz (filter on)
Input characteristic impedance 500 kΩ 100 Ω 100 mΩ
Zero /Span –
Output 0-10 V 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Output signal –
Dimensions Max. load impedance at I-output - 400 Ω
yes, switchable
ment range
10.5 V 21 mA
rent
Ripple < 20 mVeff
General
PIN assignment Input/output protection Overvoltage DC 30 V, Output short circuit-proof
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR
Resolution 16-bit
Configuration Switch
Data storage Flash
Termination screw terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2
Range adjustment Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Laser printer labels A4 681031 LEB-A4 1
unpunched
2.43
Interface Technology · Microcompact analogue/limit value switch
Input/output: 0–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 2–10 mA, 0–5 V, 1–5 V, 2–10 V adjustable
Output: switching transistor DC 30 V/100 mA adjustable (LiveZero)

Screw terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 750322 LCON AALS DFDT 806210 1
Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 24 V 751322 LCON AALS DFDT 806211 1
Input 0–10 V, 0–5 V, 1–5 V, 2–10 V 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 2–10 mA
Measurement input 0–10 V, 0–5 V, 1–5 V, 2–10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 2–10 mA, adjustable via soft-
ware FDT/DTM, connection via micro USB
Delay ON/OFF 5 ms – 200 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default: 50 ms)
Step response (10–90%) 10 ms – 500 ms (adjustable by means of filter stage 1–5, default: 100 ms)
Input characteristic impedance 500 kΩ 100 Ω
Dimensions Ausgangsseite Analog 0-10 V, 0–5 V, 1–5 V, 2–10 V 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 2–10 mA
Output signal adjustable via software FDT/DTM, connection via micro USB
yes, switchable
ment range
10.5 V 21 mA
rent
Ripple < 20 mVeff
Ausgangsseite Schalttransistor
Output signal adjustable via software FDT/DTM, connection via micro USB
Contact type Switching transistor, non short-circuit proof
PIN assignment Max. switching voltage DC 30 V
Operating mode Limit value, timeframe, tendency+, tendency-, tendency+/-, inversion, error memo-
ry
LiveZero can be activated via switch and FDT/DTM
General
Operation voltage range 16.8/30 V
Status Indication LED green/red
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR
Resolution 16-bit
Data storage Flash
Range adjustment Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94 V-0)
Termination screw terminal: 0.14–1.5 mm2
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Insulation plate 760809 TP 7-0809 5
Laser printer labels A4 681031 LEB-A4 1
unpunched
2.44
Notes
2.45
3. Supply and Safety
Supply and Safety
Industrial Power Supplies

As an expert partner to industrial automation, Lütze offers a
comprehensive product portfolio of power supply and UPS Contents
(uninterruptible power supply) units and optimum line protection
in the DC 24V range. Product Overview
DELTA Series Basics: Power Supply
• One- and three-phase and Line Protection
• 10 W to 960 W
• Configurable in parallel
• Open circuit and continuous short-circuit proof DELTA Series
• Redundant operation with integrated isolation One-phase
• High efficiency
Three-phase
• Protection classes 1 and 2
• UL and Class 1 Div.2, A,B,C,D, T4 Redundant module
• Outstanding value for money
• Long service life COMPACT Series
One-phase
COMPACT Series One-, two-, three-phase
• One-, two- and three-phase Three-phase
• 30 W to 960 W
• Overload current 150%, 5 sec LCOPS DC UPS
• Extremely compact
• Configurable in parallel UPS ECO
• Open circuit and continuous short-circuit proof Power supply+DC UPS, one-phase
• Redundant operation
• Up to 95% efficiency LOCC-Box DC Line Protection
• Protection class 1 Standard
• UL, Semi F47
• Long service life with communication channel
Gateways
LCOPS DC UPS
Varioprint Protection Modules
• 240 W to 960 W
• Patented charging method Function modules
• Charge factor up to 1.02
• Thermal management Microcompact Constant Voltage Source
• Temperature-compensated diagnostics Function modules
• Combination units comprising power supply and UPS
• Monitoring tool
LOCC-Box - the intelligent DC line protection

• Adjustable nominal current DC 1 A to DC 10 A
• Five programmable characteristics (based on Z, B, C, K)
• Intelligent detection of capacitive loads
• Secure storage of most recent state
• Manual ON/OFF
• Sealed settings
• Integrated communications channel with interface to higher-level
communications systems such as CANopen, ProfiNet, Ethercat
• Up to 95% efficiency
• UR
3.1
Power Supplies · Product Overview
DELTA Series
1-phase, 10 W 1-phase, 1-phase, 30 W 1-phase, 60 W 1-phase, 120 W 1-phase, 240 W

15/18 W
COMPACT Series
1-phase 30 W 1-phase 70 W 1-phase 120 W 1-phase 240 W 1-phase 480 W 1-/2-phase 120 W
LOCC-Box DC24V Line Protection
Standard Intelligent Gateway Gateway Gateway Power

DC 1 A to DC 1 A to CANopen ProfiNet Ethercat feed
DC 10 A DC 10 A
Varioprint Protection Modules
Function
modules
Page 3.65
3.2
Power Supplies · Product Overview
1-phase, 480W 3-phase, 120W 3-phase, 240W 3-phase, 480W 3-phase, 960W Redundant module
Page 3.26 Page 3.23 Page 3.25 Page 3.27 Page 3.28 Seite 3.29
1-/2-/3-phase 3-phase 480 W 3-phase 720 W 3-phase 960 W 1-phase 120 W

240 W IP65
Potential
distribution
Page 3.60
Microcompact Constant Voltage Source
Function
modules
Page 3.66
3.3
Power Supplies · Basics
A power supply has a decisive influence 2. Safety • Basic insulation
on the availability and operational Insulation to provide basic protection against
reliability of electrical systems. The safety of people and equipment is hazardous structure-borne currents.
always the priority. Accordingly, power • Supplementary insulation
Consequently, the selection of the right supplies must comply with unified regulations Protection against hazardous structure-
power supply should be just as critically and standards. borne currents if the basic insulation fails.
and carefully undertaken as that of the • Double insulation
other system components. 2.1 Galvanic isolation Insulation comprising both basic insulation
and supplementary insulation.
1. General structure Galvanic isolation generally refers to the • Reinforced insulation
isolation between two conductive objects, Unified insulation system. Provides equiva-
Regardless of the technology employed, such as metal plates or electrical circuits. lent protection to double insulation.
power supplies are devices with an input side In the case of electrical circuits it is conse-
and an isolated output side. quently not possible for charge carriers to 2.3 Safe isolation
flow from one circuit into another, as there is
no electrically conductive connection between Safe isolation according to EN 50178 is
the two. required for all interfaces between different
Input side Output side electrical circuits, such as between a SELV
In the case of power supplies this means that circuit and a mains circuit.
there is no electrical connection between the
L L+ input and output sides. Safe isolation means that no current flow can
occur from one electrical circuit to another.
N 2.2 Insulation This isolation has to be implemented either by
double or reinforced insulation or by means of
PE L– The different kinds of insulation are specified protective shielding.
in IEC/EN 60950:
2.4 Secondary grounding
In technology terms, however, there are two • Functional insulation
different basic designs: Insulation needed for the correct operation In case of secondary grounding, the output
of the equipment. side of the power supply is connected to
Unregulated and regulated. protective earth (PE) in order to prevent
dangerous ground faults.
The regulated variants are subdivided into
linear-regulated and switched-mode power
supplies.
L L+
Power Supply N
PE L–
Unregulated Regulated
Secondary grounding
A ground fault occurs if a current-carrying line

Linear-regulated Switched-mode has contact to earth. In the worst case, two
simultaneous ground faults can lead to a
Secondary Primary bridging of switches and thus can start
Switched-mode Switched-mode equipment accidentally.
The key criteria in selection of a power supply are:
Input side: Output side:

Ground fault
Input voltage Output voltage
Primary grounding Secondary grounding If secondary grounding is used, the
Current consumption Short-circuit current occurrence of such a ground fault leads to a
Inrush current Residual ripple so-called short circuit to earth which causes
Input fuse Output characteristics the fuses in the secondary circuit to trip.
Frequency Output current
DC supply
Power failure buffering
Power Factor Correction (PFC)
3.4
2.5 SELV • Protection class I 3.3 Manual range selection
SELV according to IEC/EN 60950 is a safety In addition to the basic insulation, all electri- In case of manual range selection, the hous-
extra low voltage which thanks to its low level cally conductive parts of the housing are ing of the device is equipped with a selector
and insulation offers better protection against connected to PE. This guarantees that no switch for manual input voltage range selec-
electric shock than higher-tension circuits. electric shock can occur in the event of an tion. Lütze offers devices permitting operation
insulation failure. at AC 115V or 230V.
Power supplies generating SELV, for The operating voltage range is then
example, must be designed to prevent • Protection class II AC 90 V to AC 132 V; AC 185 V to AC 264 V
shorting between the primary and secondary or DC 300 V to DC 370 V.
windings and their connections. The windings Protection against electric shock is not only
can only be overlaid if double or reinforced based on the basic insulation. The housing is 4 Self-protection
insulation is placed between them. This equipped with reinforced or double insulation.
isolation is termed galvanic isolation. If the housing is made of electrically conduc- If motors or other large loads have to be
Grounding of the secondary side is not tive material, no direct contact between the started with high inrush currents, secondary
required but permitted. housing and current-carrying parts is possi- branches selectively switched off, systems
ble. The housings of class II devices are not moved to a safe state in case of overload or
The peak value must not exceed 42.4 V in equipped with a PE connection. It is important the power supply switched off as quickly as
case of AC voltages and 60 V in case of to note that the PE connection is not only possible in case of fault for the sake of
DC voltages. used for the grounding of housings but also process safety, the output behaviour of the
to connect filters for EMC measures power supplies play a key role.
2.6 PELV (electromagnetic compatibility) to ground.
This is why even devices of which the hous- There are basically two types outside of
PELV according to IEC/EN 60950 is a ings are completely made of plastic material nominal operation. Overload, which can occur
protective extra low voltage with safe can be equipped with a PE connection. sporadically or continuously, and short-circuit.
isolation. In case of PELV, the electrical
circuits are grounded and (like SELV) safely Overload means that the current required by
isolated from circuits of higher voltages. • Protection class III the loads exceeds the nominal current of the
The voltage limits are identical to SELV. power supply.
The device is operated with safety extra-low
PELV is used where active low-voltage voltage (SELV) and thus does not require any A short-circuit is a special form of overload. In
conductors or the equipment structures have protection measures. Power supplies are this case, the outputs of the power supply are
to be grounded for operational reasons. That usually class I or II equipment. interconnected at very low resistance, as a
is the case, for example, where potential result of which the output current may
equalisation is required to prevent sparking 2.8 Degree of protection assume extremely high values.
inside vessels and explosive rooms.
According to DIN EN 60529, electrical State-of-the-art Lütze power supplies offer the
Thanks to the housing earth, hazardous equipment is classified using so-called IP following protective functions:
leakage currents can be discharged via the codes. IP stands for "International Protection"
structure independently of the low voltage or "Ingress Protection". The IP code consists Fold-back characteristic/Hiccup mode
when interference occurs on other equipment of two figures: The first digit specifies the pro-
whose touchable conductive parts receive tection against accidental contact and against Lütze power supplies supply a current
mains voltage. ingress of solid foreign bodies; the second typically up to 1.2 times the nominal output
digit specifies the protection against ingress current. They automatically switch off if the
2.7 Protection class of water. current consumption of the connected loads
exceeds this value or if a short-circuit occurs.
The standard IEC/EN 61140 defines Since power supplies are mostly installed After a defined period of time, the power
protection classes for electrical equipment. inside cabinets, their typical degree of supply tries to restart the load. If the overload
The devices are classified according to the protection is IP 20. or the short-circuit still exists, it switches off
safety measures taken to prevent electric again. This procedure repeats until the fault is
shock. The protection classes are divided into 3 Input voltage ranges cleared. The power supply has "hiccups". In
the classes 0, I, II and III. applications requiring high starting currents,
3.1 Wide-range input it must be ensured that the overload current
• Protection class 0 capacity is higher than 1.2 IN. To do so, Lütze
Wide-range input means that the device can also offers devices with overload capacity of
Apart from the basic insulation there is no be operated with any voltage within the 1.5 IN featuring Hiccup mode. Another aspect
protection against electric shock. These specified limits. Lütze devices operate in the is response to short-circuit. The output
devices cannot be connected to electrical single-phase range from AC 90V to AC 264V voltage is cut very rapidly. Whereas the use
installations with PE. Equipment of class 0 is or DC 110V to DC 370V and in the three- of conventional line protection equipment in
not allowed in Germany. Protection class 0 phase range from AC 340V to AC 576V or the secondary circuit is very critical in any
will no longer be considered in future versions DC 480V to DC 820V. There is no loss of case, the function under Hiccup mode is not.
of the standard. power, i.e. the device is able to deliver the Electronic overload protection units such as
specified rated power over the entire input the Lütze LOCC-Box should always be used
voltage range. in such cases. They provide safe protection in
all circumstances.
3.2 Autorange
Power supplies that are equipped with

autorange behaviour perform an internal
measurement of the applied supply voltage
and automatically switch between the
available input voltage ranges.
3.5
up to a degree where safe operation is no 8 Line cross-section and protection
longer guaranteed. There are a number of
techniques for protecting the power supply 8.1 Input-side protection
against destruction due to overheating.
If power supplies have their own input protection,
• The maximum output power is reduced, such as a safety fuse, no further protective
U/I characteristic allowing the power supply to cool down. measures are necessary. However, standards
stipulate that a power supply must be capable of
Lütze power supplies with a U/I characteristic • The device is switched off completely and being disconnected from the supply mains by
perform current limiting to typically 1.2 times cannot resume operation until a manual external means. Line protection equipment can
the nominal current at constant output reset is performed. Depending on the then be used. For the relevant characteristics
voltage. This current is still available in case manufacturer, the reset is done either using refer to the LÜTZE data sheets.
of an overload or a short circuit. The voltage a corresponding switch or by disconnecting
is slowly lowered, while the output current the supply voltage. 8.2 Output-side protection
may rise further (triangular current limiting).
Since the current does not sag in case of an • The device only switches off the output and Alongside the output behaviour described in
overload, this method enables reliable starting does not switch it on until the temperature section 4, there is a U/I characteristic with an
of high loads. falls below a certain limit value. This is the additional power reserve. However, all these
most frequently used method nowadays, output behaviour modes are ultimately not
and is the one used by LÜTZE. suitable for safe activation of standard line
protection equipment. The reason lies in the
100 7 General parameters technical design of the equipment. Only
230 VAC electronic protection devices capable of
Output voltage [%]
115 VAC
7.1 Open circuit resistance reacting fast enough to overload or short-
50
circuit offer a solution. These devices also
Open circuit resistant power supplies require feature a high degree of repeat accuracy
no minimum load in order to provide a stable across the entire temperature range. With
output voltage. This is important, for example, the LOCCBox LÜTZE offers intelligent DC
0
100 110 120 130 140 150 160
in the case of time-critical applications in protection modules which can also be
which a load is applied which has to be integrated into field bus communications
Output Current [%]
immediately supplied with voltage. Power systems. (See also Electronic overload
5 Influence of ambient temperature supplies which are not open circuit resistant protection, page ).
often require up to the seconds range until an
The ambient temperature has a direct actual supply takes place. 8.3 Selectivity
influence on the maximum possible output
power of a power supply and so on its 7.2 Resistance to reverse feed Selectivity means the tripping coordination.
response to short-circuit or overload. In electrical systems, distinction can be
Temperatures inside cabinets may be over The resistance to reverse feed specifies up made between "series selectivity", which
60 °C as a result of internal or external to which voltage a power supply is immune means that individual fuses connected in
influences. Power supplies still have to against the feeding of voltages into the series are selective against each other,
operate reliably even at such high tempera- secondary side. Such a current flow can and "parallel selectivity", which means that
tures. Due to the components used, however, occur if power supplies are operated in electrical circuits connected in parallel are
there is a point as from which the output parallel or inductive consumers are selective against each other.
power has to be reduced. That point is connected.
described by so-called derating. The Series selectivity
Delta series from Lütze is rated for ambient 7.3 Overvoltage protection
temperatures up to 70°C for example, with (secondary side) In case of series-connected fuses, the trip-
derating beginning at 60°C. The reduction in ping coordination of fuses is considered as
output power is 2.5%/°C. In case of an internal error of the power selective if only the fuse installed nearest to
supply, this protection mechanism prevents the fault trips. Fuses that are located nearer
the occurrence of overvoltage on the to the energy feeding point do not trip. This
secondary side that could possibly damage guarantees that as many system parts as
or even destroy a connected load or exceed possible remain operative in the event of one
100
the SELV voltage limit. single fault, resulting in an increased avail-
ability of electrical systems.
Power out [%]
75
7.4 Power failure buffering
Power supplies must be able to maintain

their output voltage for a certain time in
0 case of supply voltage dips. Usually, a power
-25 61 71 failure buffering time of at least 20 ms is
Temperature [oC]
aspired in order to provide buffering for one
Example: Derating curve of Lütze of Delta complete cycle of the mains voltage. In the
series semiconductor industry longer time are
required. The devices must then comply with
6 Thermal protection the requirements of SEM F47. Most LÜTZE
devices do so.
When operating a power supply under
extreme conditions for a long duration,
e.g. in case of permanent operation within the Rule of thumb:
power limits or in case of very high ambient The fuses must differ by two nominal quantities
temperatures, the power supply can heat
3.6
Parallel selectivity 9 PFC (Power Factor Correction) - Identical lengths of the supply lines
Based on the self-protection, the output Since 1 January 2001, the European - Identical conductor cross-sections of the
voltage is switched off or reduced in the event standard regarding the limits for harmonic supply lines
of a fault. If multiple loads are carried on one current emissions (IEC/EN 61000-3-2) is in
power supply, a voltage drop will occur force. This standard defines the maximum - Terminal screws have to be fastened with
throughout the entire application. To prevent allowed intensity of harmonic currents fed the same torque to guarantee equal contact
this, protective devices are installed in the back into the supplying mains system. It is resistances.
individual lines to the consumers. If a fault applicable for consuming devices with an
occurs, the protective device concerned must active power input between 75 and 100 W • The output voltages of the power supplies
trip fast enough so as to disconnect the faulty that are directly connected to the public should not differ by more than 50 mV in the
consumer reliably from the rest of the system electricity supply. Power supplies for industrial open circuit state. Otherwise safe operation
and such that the other consumers remain applications often do not require PFC, since cannot be guaranteed.
available. large installations are equipped with a central
PFC, installed between the internal electrical 10.2 Redundancy
system and the public electricity supply.
The term redundancy generally denotes the
9.1 Passive PFC existence of several objects that are identical
in functionality, content or nature.
For passive PFC, a reactance coil is In industrial automation, redundancy ensures
connected to the input circuit. This reactance that in the event of failure of a power supply
coil buffers energy from the mains and thus another one takes over the supply, thereby
reduces the current pulses. The lower the maintaining operation of the system.
pulses, the less harmonics are produced. For this the individual power supplies must be
The advantage of this solution is its easy isolated from each other, as one faulty power
implementation into existing circuitry. supply might impact on the other one. In the
However, the drawback is that it is not able worst case the failed power supply effects a
to reduce all harmonics. secondary-side short-circuit, which would
result in failure of the second power supply.
9.2 Active PFC To isolate the power supplies from each other,
isolating diodes (so-called O-ring diodes)
Active PFC is able to deliver considerably must be looped into the secondary outputs
better results. In a very simplified of the power supplies. They then prevent
consideration, one could say that the actual reciprocal loading. This ensures uninterrupt-
power supply is preceded by another power ible power supply. In the LÜTZE Delta series
supply that performs a regulation of the the isolating diodes are built-in to the output.
current consumption from the mains. In the Compact series the diodes must be
This consumption is oriented towards the installed externally as follows:
sinusoidal supply voltage. Using this
technology, it is possible to avoid the
8.4 Connection cross-sections production of almost every kind of harmonics.
However, the circuitry is much more complex
The line cross-sections are selected than for passive PFC. LÜTZE power supplies – VO – VO
dependent on the maximum output current. are all equipped with active PFC. – VO
+ VO
The following table provides an overview
+ VO
of the current capacities of multi-core move- 10 Applications Rdy
able copper cables with different conductor Rdy
cross-sections at a temperature of 30 °C 10.1 Parallel connection of power supplies
and up to a nominal voltage of 1000 V for increased capacity Operation
– VO
(to DIN 57100-523). – VO
An increase of the output power can be + VO
obtained by connecting power supplies in + VO + VO
parallel. This can be necessary if the current Rdy
2
Cross-section in mm A
required by the load is higher than a single Rdy
0.75 12 power supply can deliver, for example after
15 the expansion of an existing installation. The LÜTZE offers isolating diodes up to a nominal
1
following preconditions must be met when current of DC20A.
1.5 18 connecting power supplies in parallel for the
26 purpose of increased capacity:
2.5
4 34 • Parallel connection is only allowed for

6 44 identical power supplies.
10 61
• The power supplies have to be switched on
simultaneously.
• The following points must be observed when

connecting the power supplies in order to
prevent different voltage drops on the supply
lines or at the terminals which would lead to
unbalanced load at the common connection
point:
3.7
Current Control System · Basics
Reliable protection of DC 24V circuits In this, the device with power boost Selective switch-off
continuously supplies 1.2 to 1.3 times the
Intelligent safeguarding of selectivity nominal current in the temperature range up Selective load protection means that in case
to +45°C. On reducing the output voltage, a of overload or short-circuit only the faulty
Primary switching controllers and automatic maximum of 2.5 times the nominal current is current path is switched off, with no reactive
power units nowadays form the basis of the reached which - dependent on the device effect on the supply. The standards
DC 24V supply level. Due to the operating itself and the characteristic of the automatic EN60204-1 (line protection and fire
behaviour of those devices, the specified circuit-breaker - may be just enough to effect prevention) and EN 61131-1 and -2 (operating
selective protection of individual circuits, a shutdown. states and storage) are also applicable to the
especially in case of overcurrent, is virtually rating of the overcurrent protection device in
unfeasible. A complete system shutdown is Characteristics of automatic DC 24V circuits. In concrete terms, this
inevitable. circuit-breakers means withstanding a mains power failure
lasting 10ms without functional impairment,
Operating behaviour of primary switching The trip curve of an automatic circuit-breaker which demands the deployment of large
controllers with characteristic B (Figure 1) is considered input capacities. Furthermore, hazardous
by way of example. To record smaller over- overcurrents must be reduced to a safe level
Switched-mode power supplies and their currents, a thermal trip in the minutes to within 5s. Rating is made more difficult by
components are rated for a specific nominal hours range is used (hold >1h at I = 1.13 x the fact that nowadays many parallel con-
value and run hot under higher load. To Inom and trip <1h at I = 1.45 x Inom). Switch-off sumers are supplied by way of one protection
protect against self-destructing, they shut in case of high overcurrents is effected by element.
down at between 1.1 and 2.5 times the immediate magnetic tripping within 0.01 to
nominal current, according to type. Many 0.1 seconds. If such a device is used in LÜTZE LOCC-Box – the intelligent current
devices feature Hiccup mode, which switches conjunction with a 10A switched-mode power monitoring system
off in case of overload and automatically supply, the switch-off occurs at 1.2 times the
switches back on after a short time. If the nominal current only after 20 to 60 minutes.
overload persists, the process repeats until Even at 2.5 times nominal current (power
the fault is manually rectified. This means boost) between 25 seconds and two minutes
a fuse is never tripped. Using devices with elapse until switch-off in the thermal range.
a forward characteristic does not deliver In short: essential protection - in particular
success either. The power supply does not selective protection of connected devices - is
switch off, but supplies only a 1.1 to 1.2 times not provided. The fuse essentially performs a
higher output current when the output voltage dummy function. In the event of a short-circuit
is reduced. This characteristic likewise does or faulty wire supply would be maintained at
not trip an automatic circuit-breaker, or if it 2.5 times nominal current. System failure or
does, then only in the hours range. even a cable fire may be the consequence.
Furthermore, both output modes have the
disadvantage that loads such as DC motors Figure 2: LOCC-Box single module
or capacitive consumers cannot be started.
At additional cost, operation of heavy loads The ideal solution would be one which is
can be achieved in the simplest case by capable of optimally operating capacitive
using a device with a higher output power or loads to start heavy loads and quickly detect-
a device with integrated power boost. ing an overcurrent in operation and switching
off only the affected path. Such a system
should of course store the fault so as to
prevent danger from switching back on and
permit diagnosis. The Lütze LOCC-Box
system meets those requirements in a modu-
lar design with additional intelligent functions.
To meet the widely varying demands on
switch-off response, the LOCC-Box system
features the facility to program 10 different
characteristics by way of a switch. Both
standard automatic unit characteristics and
in particular custom characteristics can be
implemented. The nominal current range can
additionally be selected with locking settings
from 1A to 10A. The adjustable current range
and characteristic is very important when
retrofitting, as in such cases the device
protection often has to be modified and
adapted. As additional information, the
capacity utilisation of the path is indicated
by an LED. When 90% of the programmed
current value is reached the status LED starts
to flash. In the event of a switch-off due to
overcurrent or short-circuit, in addition to the
visual indication by a red LED.
3.8
A 24V signal is set as a collective fault available channels are required. If that is not rail, end terminal). The particular advantage
warning. This eliminates the need to install the case, or if only one channel has to be of this method of infeed is the screwless
and wire additional auxiliary contacts. A additionally implemented subsequently, contact carriage, which permits exchanging
restart after clearing the fault is then effected money and space will be wasted. Another of individual channels in operation without
either using the mechanical switch on the disadvantage of this solution is the looping interrupting the entire supply. This additional
device or from the main system by remote of up to 40A via a printed circuit board. This provides functionality to switch off individual
control. This channel-based switching facility entails an enormous load on the carrier paths to perform essential work safely. The
is of great importance in particular in the material and interruption of the entire supply maximum supply current is dictated by the
commissioning phase of a system, as it when a device is replaced. What in other 6mm2 terminal, and is DC 40A. The slim
enables individual system components to be areas of automation has been state of the art width of just 8.1mm results in an installed
activated and checked specifically. for over 10 years is also ideal here as the width of just 340mm even with a 40-channel
solution in a highly modular configuration! configuration. The system housing is comple-
LOCC-Box mented by name plate labels, seals and a
Practical and efficient Here, too, the LOCC-Box system is setting jumper system to loop signals.
new standards. The single-channel design
The monitoring function itself is one side of with all the functionality described offers the
the coin. The other in many other systems highest possible flexibility. As shown below,
is the associated mechanism. Frequently customers can decide whether the supply is
multi-channel solutions are offered on the provided by each module individually or via
market which only make sense if exactly the the system supply (infeed terminal, copper
Standard Application Empty housing

without supply set, art. no. 716425 with supply set, art. no. 716425 as placeholder
Jumper
Jumper comb (white)
(white)
DC
12/24 V
Art.
Art. no.
7164
71642525
The supply The supply voltage
voltage is fed via the supply The empty casing,
is fed direct to terminals without contacts
spring terminal 6 art. no. 716424,
0 V ((reference):
reference): can be used as a
DC 12/24 V: terminal 5 placeholder
placeholder for future
DC
terminal 6 12/24
12/24 V enhanceme
enhancements.
nts.
0 V ((reference):
reference): DC 12/24 V
terminal 5
Use with additional The supply terminal is accessed via an aperture in the Individual
supply terminals left hand side wall. This enables a variable positioning construction with
Supply set, art. no. 716425 and in the system construction. The maximum total current
supply terminal, art. no. 716421 can thus be increased to 70 A. distance terminal
DC 24 V
The
Art. n
Art. no.
o. distance
71642
716425 5 terminal
Art. no.
716422
is used as
asspacer
pacer
Art.
Art. no.
no. or as
71642
716421 1 isolation.
isolation.
DC DC DC
12/
12/24
24 V
Supply
Supply v via
ia
12/
12/24
24 V 12/24
12/24V
next block spring
terminal 6.
Dual supply left Additional

Additional supply Additional
Additional supply righ
rightt or
in the middle outlet to next block
3.9
0V Collective
Collective Te
Terminal
rminal
Th
The
e00VV collective
collective terminal 716
716420
420 ena
enables
bles the 0V retur
return
n ffrom
rom the load to the 0V supply in the tig
tightest
htest spac
space.
e.
The
The integrated
integrated sliding
sliding contact enables
enables an ins
insulation
ulation meas
measurement
urement when the contac
contactt iiss open.
open.
Power Supply
24 V/20 A
Standard
Standard A
Application
pplication
with
withssupply
upply s
set,
et, art. no. 71642
716425
5
PIN no. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Load
PIN no. 5, 6 Con
Consumer
sumer
5, 6
Co
Construction
nstruction
of the
the
0V Collective
Collective
te
terminal
rminal
with supply
supply set
Art. no. 716425
716425
1-4
1-4
3.10
DELTA Power Supplies
DELTA Series
• One- and three-phase
• 10 W to 960 W
• Open circuit and continuous short-circuit proof
• Redundant operation with integrated isolation
• High efficiency
• Protection classes 1 and 2
• UL and Class 1 Div.2, A,B,C,D, T4
• Outstanding value for money
• Long service life
3.11
·
Primary switchmode power supply, Single-phase, Class 2

Input: wide-range input AC 90–265 V, DC 120–370 V
Output: 5 V / 12 V, adjustable

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 5 V/ 2 A 728761 DRA 10-05A 1
DC 12 V/ 0.84 A 728766 DRA 10-12A 1
Input DRA 10-05A DRA 10-12A

Nominal voltage AC 100–240 V
Operation voltage range AC 90–265 V / DC 120–370 V
Rated current Ui= AC 115 V: 120 mA / Ui= AC 230 V: 70 mA
Inrush current Ui= AC 115 V: 10 A / Ui= AC 230 V: 18 A
Internal fuse T2 A / AC 250 V
External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: B 4 A
Power Factor Correction P.F.C. –
Dimensions Output
Rated voltage output DC 5 V DC 12 V
Rated current output 2A 0.84 A
Max. output current –
Short-circuit current –
Voltage trim range 4.5–5.75 V 10.8–13.8 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Line regulation ±1 %
Load regulation ±2 %
Rise time 1s
PIN assignment Temperature coefficient ±0.03 % / °C
Ripple & Noise <50 mV
Hold up time Vin= 115 V: 25 ms / Vin= 230 V: 100 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4.5 V ≥10.8 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red <3.75–4.50 V <9–10.8 V
Parallel/redundant operation max. 2 devices / via external diodes
Efficiency 73 % 75 %
Low power loss 4 A (AC 230 V) 3.4 A (AC 230 V)
Rated over load protection 110–135 %
Over voltage protection 125–145 %
Short circuit characteristics Hiccup-mode
General
Derating Switching frequency approx. 100 kHz
Insulation voltage input / ground AC 1.5 kVeff
Insulation voltage output / ground –
Insulation resistance at DC 500 V 100 MΩ
Operation temperature range -20 °C – 70 °C (derating)
Derating -3% / ° C starting at 61° C
M.T.B.F. 801000 h 803000 h
Relative humidity 20–95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions (w × h × d) in mm 22.5 × 90.0 × 115.0
Redundant operation
Cooling Natural air cooling, 25 mm distance on all sides
Housing material Plastic
Application height 2000 m
Installation postition vertical
IP rating II (SELV, PELV)
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2,max. 0.56 Nm
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1, UL 1310 Class 2; TÜV: EN 60950-1, CE: EN
50081-1 / EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 601000-3-3, EN 50082-1 / EN
55024
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) LED green/red
Switching voltage –
Switching current –
Switching capacity –
Insulation voltage –
3.12
·

Output: 5 V / 12 V / 15 V / 24 V, adjustable

Spring terminal
Output voltage/current DC 5 V/ 2 A 722761 DRA 10-05 1
DC 12 V/ 0.84 A 722766 DRA 10-12 1
DC 15 V/ 0,67 A 722773 DRA 10-15 1
DC 24 V/ 0.42 A 722751 DRA 10-24 1
Input DRA 10-05 DRA 10-12 DRA 10-15 DRA 10-24

Dimensions External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: B 4 A
Output
Rated voltage output DC 5 V DC 12 V DC 15 V DC 24 V
Rated current output 2A 0.84 A 0.67 A 0.42 A
Voltage trim range 4.5–5.75 V 10.8–13.8 V 13.5–17.25 V 21.6–28.8 V
Accuracy ±1 %
PIN assignment Rise time 1s
Temperature coefficient ±0.03 % / °C
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4.5 V ≥10.8 V ≥13.5 V ≥21.6 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red <3.75–4.50 V <9–10.8 V <11.25–13.5 V <18–21.6 V
Efficiency 73 % 75 % 76 % 77 %
Low power loss 4 W (AC 230 V) 3.4 W (AC 230 V) 3.3 W (AC 230 V) 2.8 W (AC 230 V)
Derating General
Switching frequency approx. 100 kHz
Derating -3% / ° C starting at 61° C
M.T.B.F. 801000 h 803000 h 805000 h 808000 h
Redundant operation Relative humidity 20–95% RH, non-condensing
Pollution degree 2
Termination Spring terminal: 0.2–2.0 mm2
55024
Monitoring
3.13
·

Output: 5 V, adjustable

Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DRA 18-05A DRA 18-05

Inrush current Ui= AC 115 V: 10 A / Ui= AC 230 V :18 A
Dimensions Power Factor Correction P.F.C. –
Output
Rated voltage output DC 5 V
Rated current output 3A
Voltage trim range 4.5–5.75 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Rise time 1s
Hold up time Ui= 115 V: 20 ms / Ui= 230 V: 75 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4.5 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red <3.75–4.50 V
Efficiency 75 %
Low power loss 5 A (AC 230 V)
General
Derating -3% / °C starting at 60 °C
M.T.B.F. 795000 h
Redundant operation Dimensions (w × h × d) in mm 22.5 × 90.0 × 115.0
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2,max. 0.56
Spring terminal: 0.2–2.0 mm2
Nm
55024
Monitoring
3.14
·

Output: 12 V / 15 V / 24 V, adjustable

Spring terminal
Output voltage/current DC 12 V/ 1.5 A 722767 DRA 18-12 1
DC 15 V/ 1.2 A 722774 DRA 18-15 1
DC 24 V/ 0.75 A 722752 DRA 18-24 1
Input DRA 18-12 DRA 18-15 DRA 18-24

Output
Rated voltage output DC 12 V DC 15 V DC 24 V
Rated current output 1.5 A 1.2 A 0.75 A
Voltage trim range 10.8–13.8 V 13.5–17.25 V 21.6–28.8 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Rise time 1s
Hold up time Ui= 115 V: 20 ms / Ui= 230 V: 75 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥10.8 V ≥13.5 V ≥21.6 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red <9–10.8 V <11.25–13.5 V <18–21.6 V
Efficiency 77 %
Low power loss 4.65 W (AC 230 V) 4.25 W (AC 230 V) 4.45 W (AC 230 V)
General
M.T.B.F. 797000 h 796000 h 800000 h
Pollution degree 2
55024
Monitoring
3.15
·


Screw terminal
DC 12 V/ 2.5 A 722768 DRA 30-12A 1
DC 24 V/ 1.25 A 722753 DRA 30-24A 1
DC 48 V/ 0.625 A 722775 DRA 30-48A 1
Input DRA 30-05A DRA 30-12A DRA 30-24A DRA 30-48A

mm [inch] Power Factor Correction P.F.C. –
40.5 [1.59] 115 [4.53]
54321 Output
- - ++ Rdy
Rated current output 6A 2.5 A 1.25 A 0.625
Vout ADJ.
90.0 [3.60]
DC ON
Voltage trim range 5–5.5 V 12/14 V 24/28 V 48/55 V
N L Accuracy ±1 %
6 7 8
Line regulation ±0.5 %
93.8 [3.75]
Load regulation ±0.5 %
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4 V ≥9.6 V ≥19.2 V ≥37 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red –
Efficiency 79 % 84 % 86 %
Low power loss 8.5 W (AC 230 V) 5.6 W (AC 230 V) 5.5 W (AC 230 V) 4.9 W (AC 230 V)
Rated over load protection 120 – 136 % 110 – 140 %
Derating General
Derating -2.5% / °C starting at 60 °C
M.T.B.F. 551000 h 582000 h 588000 h 609000 h
Pollution degree 2
61000-6-3 / EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 601000-3-3, EN 55024, EN
61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN
61000-4-6 ,EN 61000-4-8, EN 61000-4-11
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) – Open Collector –
Switching voltage – DC 24 V –
Switching current – ≤ 35 mA –
Insulation voltage – none –
3.16
·


Spring terminal
DC 12 V/ 2.5 A 728768 DRA 30-12 1
DC 24 V/ 1.25 A 728753 DRA 30-24 1
DC 48 V/ 0.625 A 728775 DRA 30-48 1
Input DRA 30-05 DRA 30-12 DRA 30-24 DRA 30-48

Output
Rated current output 6A 2.5 A 1.25 A 0.625
Voltage trim range 5–5.5 V 12/14 V 24/28 V 48/55 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4 V ≥9.6 V ≥19.2 V ≥37 V
Low power loss 8.5 W (AC 230 V) 5.6 W (AC 230 V) 5.5 W (AC 230 V) 4.9 W (AC 230 V)
Over voltage protection 120–136 % 125–137 %
Derating General
M.T.B.F. 551000 h 582000 h 588000 h 609000 h
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1; TÜV: EN 60950-1, CE: EN 61000-6-3 / EN
55022 Class B; EN 61000-3-2, EN 601000-3-3; EN 55024; EN 61000-6-2; EN
61000-4-2; EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-6; EN
61000-4-8; EN 61000-4-11
Monitoring
3.17
·


Screw terminal
Spring terminal
Input DRA 60-05A DRA 60-05

Rated current Ui= AC 115 V, AC: 550 mA / Ui= 230 V; Ui= AC 115 V, AC: 550 mA / Ui= 230 V,
AC: 280 mA AC: 280 mA
Dimensions External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: B 4 A, C 2 A
Output
Rated current output 10 A
Voltage trim range 5.0/5.5 V
Accuracy ±1 %
PIN assignment Load regulation ±0.5 %
Rise time 1s
Ripple & Noise 50 mV
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥4 V
Efficiency 79 %
Low power loss 12.5 W (AC 230 V)
Derating Short circuit characteristics Hiccup-mode
General
M.T.B.F. 498000 h
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2,max. 0.56
Spring terminal 0.2–2.0 mm2
Nm
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1; TÜV: EN 60950-1, CE: EN 61000-6-3 / EN
55022 Class B; EN 61000-3-2, EN 601000-3-4; EN 55024; EN 61000-6-2; EN
61000-4-2; EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-6; EN
61000-4-8; EN 61000-4-11
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) –
3.18
·


Spring terminal
DC 24 V/ 2.5 A 728754 DRA 60-24 1
DC 48 V/ 1,25 A 728776 DRA 60-48 1
Input DRA 60-12 DRA 60-24 DRA 60-48

Output
Rated current output 5A 2.5 A 1.25 A
Voltage trim range 12/14 V 24/28 V 48/55 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Rise time 1s
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥9.6 V ≥19.2 V ≥37 V
General
M.T.B.F. 504000 h 520000 h 531000 h
* Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Pollution degree 2
Termination Spring terminal 0.2–2.0 mm2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1, UL 1310 Class 2 (not 12 V) recognised; TÜV:
EN 60950-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17
CE: EN 61000-6-3 / EN 55022 Class B; EN 61000-3-2
EN 601000-3-3; EN 55024; EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-4-2; EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-6; EN 61000-4-8; EN 61000-4-11
Monitoring
3.19
·


Screw terminal
DC 24 V/ 2.5 A 722754 DRA 60-24A 1
DC 48 V/ 1,25 A 722776 DRA 60-48A 1
Input DRA 60-12A DRA 60-24A DRA 60-48A

mm [inch] Output
40.5 [1.59] 115 [4.53]
54321 Rated voltage output DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 48 V

Rated current output 5A 2.5 A 1.25 A
- - ++ Rdy
Vout ADJ.
90.0 [3.60]
DC ON
Accuracy ±1 %
N L Line regulation ±0.5 %
6 7 8
93.8 [3.75]
Rise time 1s
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥9.6 V ≥19.2 V ≥37 V
General
M.T.B.F. 504000 h 520000 h 531000 h
* Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1, UL 1310 Class 2 (not 12 V) recognised; TÜV:
EN 60950-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17
CE: EN 61000-6-3 / EN 55022 Class B; EN 61000-3-2
EN 601000-3-3; EN 55024; EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-4-2; EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-6; EN 61000-4-8; EN 61000-4-11
Monitoring
3.20
·
Primary switched power supplies, PFC, one-phase, screw terminal

Input: wide-range input AC 90–132 V, AC 186–264 V, DC 210–370 V

Screw terminal, pluggable
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 3.8 A 722757 DRAN 120-24AL 1
Input DRAN 120-24AL

Nominal voltage AC 115 / 230 V (auto select)
Operation voltage range AC 90–132 V; AC 186–264 V / DC 210–370 V
Rated current Ui= AC 115 V: 1.1 A / Ui= AC 230 V: 0.55 A
Inrush current Ui= AC 115 V: 24 A / Ui= AC 230 V 48 A
Internal fuse T3, 15 A / AC 250 V
Power Factor Correction P.F.C. 0.7
Output
Dimensions Rated voltage output DC 24 V
Rated current output 3.8 A
Voltage trim range 22.5–28.5 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Load regulation Single ±1 %, Parallel ±5 %
Rise time 1s
PIN assignment Hold up time Vin= 115 V: 25 ms / Vin= 230 V: 30 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥17.6–19.4 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤17.6–19.4 V
Parallel/redundant operation max 2 devices with 90 % load current each / via external diodes
Efficiency 86 %
Low power loss 16 W (AC 230 V)
Short circuit characteristics Current limit
General
Derating Insulation voltage input / ground AC 1.5 kVeff
M.T.B.F. 486000 h
Housing material metal
Redundant operation Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
IP rating I (SELV, PELV)
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed, cUL: UL 60950-1, TÜV: EN 60950, EN 55022 Class B, EN
55024 Class 2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) Normally open
Switching voltage DC 60 V
Switching current max. 300 mA
Insulation voltage DC 500 V
3.21
·
Primary switchmode power supply, PFC, Single-phase


Output voltage/current DC 12 V/ 10 A 722770 DRAN 120-12B 1
DC 24 V/ 5 A 722758 DRAN 120-24B 1
DC 48 V/ 2.5 A 722777 DRAN 120-48B 1
Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 5 A 728758 DRAN 120-24A 1
Input DRAN 120-12B DRAN 120-24B DRAN 120-48B DRAN 120-24A

Operation voltage range AC 90–132 V; AC 186–264 V / DC 210–370 V
Dimensions Internal fuse T3, 15 A / AC 250 V
Output
Rated current output 10 A 5A 2.5 A 5A
Voltage trim range 11.4–14.5 V 22.5–28.5 V 45/55 V 22.5–28.5 V
Accuracy ±1 %
PIN assignment Load regulation Single ±1 %, Parallel ±5 %
Rise time 1s
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥10–11.2 V ≥17.6–19.4 V ≥37–43 V ≥17.6–19.4 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤10–11.2 V ≤17.6–19.4 V ≤37–43 V ≤17.6–19.4 V
Parallel/redundant operation max. 3 units at 90% load current, manual switch
Efficiency 84 % 86 % 87 % 86 %
Low power loss 24 A (AC 230 V) 20 A (AC 230 V) 19 A (AC 230 V) 20 A (AC 230 V)
Derating Short circuit characteristics Current limit
General
M.T.B.F. 440000 h 450000 h 482000 h 450000 h
Parallel/redundant mode Relative humidity 20–90% RH, non-condensing
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal:
2
Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm - pluggable,max. 0.56 Nm 0.2–4.0 mm2,max.
0.62 Nm
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1; TÜV: EN 60950, CE: EN 61000-6-3, EN
55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) – Normally open – Normaly open
Switching voltage – DC 60 V – DC 60 V
Switching current – max. 300 mA – max. 300 mA
Insulation voltage – DC 500 V – DC 500 V
3.22
·
Primary switchmode power supply, PFC, 3-phase


Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 5 A 722803 WRA 120-24 1
Input WRA 120-24

Nominal voltage 3× AC 380–480 V
Operation voltage range 3× AC 340–575 V, 3× DC 480–820 V
Inrush current 10 A
Internal fuse 3×T2, 0 A / AC 600 V
External fuse Automatic: 3 × B 6 A
Output
Accuracy 1%
Rise time 1s
PIN assignment Hold up time min. 20 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥17.6–19.4 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤17.6–19.4 V
Efficiency 89 %
Low power loss 16 W (AC 380 V)
Rated over load protection 115 - 135 %, temperature: disconnection at 100–110°C and automatic activation
when cool off
General
Derating
Derating Capacity: -2.5% / °C starting at +61 °C
M.T.B.F. 559000 h
Redundant operation Cooling Natural air cooling, 25 mm distance on all sides
Housing material Metal
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed, cUL: UL 60950-1 accepted, TÜV: EN 60950-1; CE: EN 61000-
6-3 / EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024
Monitoring
Switching current max. 300 mA
3.23
·


Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 10 A 722759 DRA 240-24B 1
DC 48 V/ 5 A 722778 DRA 240-48B 1
Screw terminal
Input DRA 240-24B DRA 240-48B DRA 240-24A

Operation voltage range AC 93–132 V, AC 186–264 V, DC 210–370 V
Dimensions External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: B 10 A, C 6 A
Output
Rated current output 10 A 5A 10 A
Voltage trim range 22.5–28.5 47/56 V 22.5–28.5 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥17.6–19.4 V ≥37–43 V ≥17.6–19.4 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤17.6–19.4 V ≤37–43 V ≤17.6–19.4 V
Parallel/redundant operation max 3 devices with 90 % load current each, switching with switch S/P
Low power loss 35 A (AC 230 V) 32 A (AC 230 V) 35 A (AC 230 V)
Derating General
M.T.B.F. 423000 h 437000 h 423000 h
Parallel/redundant mode Dimensions (w × h × d) in mm 83.0 × 142.0 × 116.0
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2- pluggable,max. 0.56 Screw terminal: 0.2–4.0
Nm mm2,max. 0.62 Nm
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1; TÜV: EN 60950, CE: EN 61000-6-3, EN
55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) Normally open – Normally open
Switching voltage DC 60 V – DC 60 V
Switching current max. 300 mA – max. 300 mA
Insulation voltage DC 500 V – DC 500 V
3.24
·

Output: 24 / 48 V, adjustable

Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 5 A 722808 WRA 240-48 1
Input WRA 240-24 WRA 240-48

Operation voltage range 3× AC 340–575 V; 3× DC 480–820 V
Inrush current 20 A
Internal fuse 3×T2, 0 A / AC 600 V
External fuse Automatic: 3 × B 6 A
Dimensions Output
Rated current output 10 A 5A
Voltage trim range 22.5/28.5 V 47/56 V
Accuracy 1%
Rise time 1s
Hold up time min. 20 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥17.6–19.4 V ≥37–43 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤17.6–19.4 V ≤37–43 V
Low power loss 30 A (AC 380 V) 24 A (AC 380 V)
PIN assignment Rated over load protection Temperature: Deactivation at 100–110°C and automatic activation after cooling off
General
Derating Capacity: -2.5% / °C starting at +61 °C
Derating M.T.B.F. 488000 h 519000 h
Parallel/redundant mode Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1 accepted; TÜV: EN 60950-1, CE: EN 61000-
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) Normally open –
Switching voltage DC 60 V –
Switching current max. 300 mA –
Insulation voltage DC 500 V –
3.25
·


Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 10 A 722779 DRA 480-48A 1
Input DRA 480-24A DRA 480-48A

Operation voltage range AC 90–264 V; DC 120–370 V
Dimensions Output
Rated current output 20 A 10 A
Voltage trim range 22.5–28.5 V 47/56 V
Accuracy ±1 %
Load regulation Single ±0.5 %, Parallel ±5 %
Derating General
M.T.B.F. 403000 h 416000 h
Pollution degree 2
Monitoring
3.26
·


Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 10 A 722809 WRA 480-48 1

Inrush current 20 A
Internal fuse T3, 15 A / per phase
External fuse Automatic: 3 × B 10 A, C 6 A
Dimensions Output
Voltage trim range 22.5 –28.5 V 47/56 V
Accuracy 1%
Rise time –
PIN assignment Status indication DC ON LED green ≥17.6–19.4 V ≥37–43 V
Efficiency 90 %
Short circuit characteristics Current limit (C) / Hiccup-Mode (D); switching with switch C/D
Hiccup-Mode: deactivation within 3s and restart after 30s
General
Derating Insulation voltage input / ground AC 1.5 kVeff
M.T.B.F. 411000 h 423000 h
Parallel/redundant mode Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL: UL 508 listed; cUL: UL 60950-1 accepted; TÜV: EN 60950-1; CE: EN 61000-
Monitoring
3.27
·


Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 20 A 722810 WRA 960-48 1

Inrush current 30 A
Internal fuse T6, 3 A / per phase
External fuse Automatic: 3 × B 16 A, C 10 A
Dimensions Output
Voltage trim range 22.5–28.5 V 47/56 V
Accuracy 1%
Rise time 1s
Hold up time 15 ms
Parallel/redundant operation max 2 devices with 92 % load current each, connection P and G for distributed cur-
rent
Low power loss –
Rated over load protection Rated over load protection: 110 % –130 %
Derating General
Derating -3.5% / °C starting at 61°C
M.T.B.F. 352000 h 390000 h
Pollution degree 2
Monitoring
3.28
·
Redundancy module 20 A with 2 inputs

Potential-free signalling contact and Status LED per input
Over- and undervoltage control

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 20 A 722987 DRP 20-24 1
Input DRP 20-24

Operation voltage range DC 21–28 V
Inputs 2
Rated current max. 20 A in total
Internal fuse –
External fuse –
Output
Dimensions Max. output current 30 A, 5 s, @ 24 V
Voltage drop 0.5 V
Inverse voltage 30 V
Low power loss Max. 10 W
Status indication DC ON LED green ON: DC input A or B OK / OFF: Error
Rated over load protection No
Over voltage protection No
General
PIN assignment Derating –
M.T.B.F. 659000 h
Cooling Air convection
Use
Protection class IP 20 (IEC529, EN60529)
Pollution degree 2
Termination Input: screw terminal: 0.2-4.0 mm2
Output: screw terminal: 0.2-6.0 mm2
Relay: screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1 recognised
CE: EN 550´22 Class B, EN 55024
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/6/8, EN 61204-3
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) Changeover contact per input
No error: input voltage >20 V or <30 V, connection 2(5) - 3(6) closed
Error: input voltage <20 V or >30 V, connection 2(5) - 1(4) closed
Switching voltage AC 300 V / DC 150 V
Switching current AC/DC 1 A
Switching capacity 300 VA / 30 W
3.29
Notes
3.30
COMPACT Power Supplies
COMPACT Series
• One-, two- and three-phase
• 30 W to 960 W
• Overload current 150 %, 5 sec
• Extremely compact
• Open circuit and continuous short-circuit proof
• Redundant operation
• Up to 95% efficiency
• Protection class 1
• UL, Semi F47
3.31
·
Primary switchmode power supply, PFC, Single-phase, Class 2

Input: wide-range input AC 90 V - 264 V, DC 100 V - 320 V
Output: DC 24 V

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 1.2 A 722790 CPSFB1-30-24 1
Input CPSFB1-30-24
Nominal voltage AC 120 V / 230 V
Inrush current <25 A
Internal fuse T 1.25 A / AC 250 V
External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: C 2 A
Power Factor Correction P.F.C. >0.6
Output
Max. output current 1.4 A @ 24 V
Short-circuit current 10 A, 50 ms
Voltage trim range –
Accuracy ±1%
Line regulation –
Load regulation <1 %
Rise time –
Temperature coefficient –
PIN assignment Ripple & Noise <80 mV pp
Hold up time >10 ms (AC 120 V); >30 ms (AC 240 V)
Status indication DC ON LED green yes
Status indication DC LOW LED red No
Efficiency >86 % (AC 120 V); > 87 % (AC 240 V)
Low power loss <4.7 W (AC 120 V); <4.3 W (AC 240 V)
Rated over load protection yes
Over voltage protection yes
General
Switching frequency approx. 70 – 110 kHz
Derating
Insulation voltage input / ground class 2, without PE
Insulation voltage output / ground class 2, without PE
Insulation resistance at DC 500 V – MΩ
Operation temperature range -20 °C – 60 °C (derating) (50°C UL508)
Derating >55°C: -0.8 W / °C
M.T.B.F. 750000 h to SN29500 / 250000 h to MIL Standard HDBK 217F
Cooling Natural air cooling, 10 mm distance right/left, 20 mm distance above/below
Redundant operation Housing material Noryl UL 94-0
Application height –m
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508, IEC 950, EN 60950, UL 60950
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
EN 50178, EN 61558, EN 61000-3-2, EN 50081-1,
EN 50082-2, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011B
Monitoring
3.32
·

Output: DC 24 V

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 1.2 A 722787 CPSF1-30-24 1
Input CPSF1-30-24
Nominal voltage AC 115 / 230 V
Operation voltage range AC 90–264 V / DC 110–370 V (DC 300 V; UL508)
External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: B 4 A, C 2 A
Output
Max. output current 2.2 A @ 24 V
Voltage trim range –
Accuracy ±1%
Line regulation –
Rise time –
Low power loss –
General
Derating Insulation voltage input/output AC 3.0 kVeff
Redundant operation
Housing material Noryl UL 94-0
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
EN 50178, EN 61558, EN 61000-3-2, EN 50081-1,
EN 50082-2, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011B
Monitoring
3.33
·

Output: DC 24 V, adjustable

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 3 A 722789 CPSF1-70-24 1
Input CPSF1-70-24
Operation voltage range AC 90–264 V / DC 100–350 V (DC 300 V; UL508)
Output
Max. output current 4 A @ 24 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time –
Low power loss –
General
Operation temperature range -20 °C – 60 °C (derating) (55°C UL508)
Redundant operation
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
EN 50178, EN 61558, EN 61000-3-2, EN 50081-1,
EN 50082-2, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011B
Monitoring
3.34
·


Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 5 A 722783 CPSB1-120-24R 1
DC 48 V/ 2.5 A 722784 CPSB1-120-48R 1
Input CPSB1-120-24R CPSB1-120-48R

Dimensions Output
Rated current output 5A 2.5 A
Max. output current 8 A, 30 s, @ 24 V 4 A, 30 s, @ 24 V
Voltage trim range DC 23–27.5 V DC 45–55 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time –
PIN assignment Ripple & Noise 30 mV
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤21.6 V ≤43.2 V
Parallel/redundant operation max. 2 devices / via internal diodes
Low power loss 19 W (AC 120 V); 13 W (AC 230 V) 20 W (AC 120 V); 13 W (AC 230 V)
General
Derating
Insulation voltage output / ground AC 0.5 kVeff
M.T.B.F. >500000 h to SN29500 / >150000 h to MIL standard HDBK 217F
Parallel mode Cooling Natural air cooling, 10 mm distance right/left, 50 mm distance above/below
Housing material Aluminium
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2- pluggable,max. 0.56 Nm
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
EN 50178, EN 61558, EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 55022 Class B
Monitoring
3.35
Power supply · regulated, 120 W
Primary switched power supplies, PFC, 1/2-phase


Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 5 A 722995 CPSB2-120-24 1
Input CPSB2-120-24
Inrush current <20 A (AC 230 V), <30 A (AC 500 V)
Internal fuse –
External fuse Automatic: D 4 A, C 6 A / safety fuse: T 4 A (required)
Output
Rated current output 5 A @ 45 °C
Max. output current >7.5 A, 5 s
Short-circuit current 38 A, 5 s
Voltage trim range 23-27,5 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time 9 ms (5–95 %) @ 400 V
Ripple & Noise <100 mV pp
PIN assignment Hold up time >20 ms (AC 120 V), >80 ms (AC 230 V)
Status indication DC LOW LED red Iout > 110 % IN
Parallel/redundant operation yes/with external decoupling diode
Efficiency 87 % – 88 %
Low power loss 16.5 W –18 W
Over voltage protection Uout>36 V
Output characteristics General
Operation temperature range -20 °C – 60 °C (overtemperature protection)
Derating >50 °C: -4 W/°C
Parallel mode
Overvoltage category II (IEC 664-1)
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 24–12) - pluggable
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508, IEC 60950
CE: EN 60950, EN 61000-6-2 (2005), EN 60100-6-4 (2007),
EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-5-5
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) yes
Switching voltage AC/DC 300 V / DC 150 V
3.36
·

Input: AC 90–132 V, AC 185–264 V, DC 300–350 V

Output voltage/current DC 24 V; 10 A 722785 CPSB1-240-24R 1
DC 48 V; 5 A 722786 CPSB1-240-48R 1

Nominal voltage AC 120 / 230 V (manual)
Operation voltage range AC 90–132 V, AC 185–264 V, DC 300–370 V
External fuse Mini-circuit breaker: C 10 A
Dimensions Output
Rated current output 10 A 5A
Max. output current 15 A, 30 s, @ 24 V 7.5 A, 30 s, @ 24 V
Voltage trim range 23/27.5 V 45/55 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Load regulation 1%
Rise time –
PIN assignment Ripple & Noise 50 mV
Hold up time >30 ms (120 V); >60 ms (230 V)
General
Derating >50°C: -6 W / °C
Parallel/redundant mode Cooling Natural air cooling, 20 mm distance right/left, 100 mm distance above/below
Overvoltage category IIII
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
Monitoring
3.37
Power supply · regulated, 240 W
Primary switched power supplies, PFC, 1/2/3-phase

Input: wide-range input AC 187–550 V, DC 250–725 V (UL: DC 300–500 V)

Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 10 A 722996 CPSB2-123-240-24 1
Input CPSB2-123-240-24
Operation voltage range AC 187–550 V / DC 250–725 V (UL: DC 300–500 V)
Rated current 1-/2-phase @ AC 220 V: 2.2 A, 1-/2-phase @ AC 500 V: 1.1 A
3-phase @ AC 220 V: 1.5 A, 3-phase @ AC 500 V: 0.8 A
Inrush current <20 A (AC 230 V), <40 A (AC 500 V)
Internal fuse –
External fuse Automatic: D 4 A, C 6 A / safety fuse: T 6.3 A (required)
Power Factor Correction P.F.C. >0.60 @ AC 230 V, >0.5 @ AC 400 V
Dimensions Output
Max. output current >15 A, 5 s
Short-circuit current 38 A, 5 s
Voltage trim range 23-27,5 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time 14 ms (5–95 %) @ 400 V
Hold up time >15 ms (AC 230 V), >100 ms (AC 500 V)
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤21.6 V
Parallel/redundant operation yes/with external decoupling diode
Efficiency >91 % @ AC 230 V, >92% @ AC 400 V
Low power loss <24 W @ AC 230 V, <21 W @ AC 400 V
Over voltage protection > DC 33 V
Derating Short circuit characteristics Hiccup-mode
General
Operation temperature range -20 °C – 60 °C (overtemperature protection)
Derating -6 W/°C from +50 °C
Output characteristics M.T.B.F. >500000 h to SN29500 / >150000 h to MIL standard HDBK 217F
Cooling Air convection 20 mm clearance right/left, 50 mm clearance up/down
Redundant operation
Overvoltage category II (IEC 664-1)
Pollution degree 2
Termination Screw terminal: 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 30–12) - pluggable
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508, IEC 60950
CE: EN 60950, EN 61000-6-2 (2005), EN 60100-6-4 (2007),
EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-5-5
EN 55011 (conducted emission class B, radiated emission class A)
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) Change over contact
Switching current DC 1 A
Switching capacity 30 W
3.38
·

Input: AC 90–132 V, AC 187–264 V

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 20 A 722986 CPSB1-480-24R 1
DC 48 V/ 10 A 722989 CPSB1-480-48R 1

Nominal voltage AC 120 V / AC 240 V
Operation voltage range AC 90–132 V / AC 187–264 V
Rated current Ui= AC 120 V: 6 A / Ui= AC 230 V: 3.5 A
Internal fuse –
External fuse Automatic: C 16 A (required)
Dimensions Output
Short-circuit current >55 A, 5 s >40 A, 5 s
Voltage trim range 23/28 V 45/55 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
PIN assignment Rise time –
Ripple & Noise 100 mV pp
Hold up time >35 ms (AC 240 V)
Efficiency >92 % (AC 240 V)
Derating General
Pollution degree 2
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508, IEC 950, EN 60950
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
Monitoring
3.39
·

Input: Wide range input AC 340 - 550 V

Screw terminal
Input CPSB3-500-24
Operation voltage range 3× AC 340–550 V
Internal fuse –
External fuse Automatic: 3 × B 16 A, C 10 A (required)
Output
Max. output current 30 A, 5 s, @ 24 V
Short-circuit current >55 A, 5 s
Voltage trim range 24/28 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time –
PIN assignment Temperature coefficient –
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤21.6 V
Efficiency >94 % (AC 400 V)
General
Derating Switching frequency approx. 70 – 110 kHz
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
Monitoring
3.40
·


Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 15 A 722807 CPSB3-720-48 1
Input CPSB3-720-24 CPSB3-720-48

Internal fuse –
Dimensions Output
Short-circuit current 60 A, 5 s 30 A, 5 s
Voltage trim range 24/28 V 45/55 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
PIN assignment Rise time –
Efficiency >94 % (AC 400 V) –
Low power loss 55 W (AC 380 V) –
Rated over load protection > 90°C, auto-reset
Over voltage protection <33 V <60 V
Short circuit characteristics Hiccup mode, 5 s ON / 7 s OFF
Derating General
Derating >50 °C: -10 W / °C
Cooling Natural air cooling, forced cooling >50°C, 50 mm distance above/below
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
Monitoring
3.41
·

Output: 24 V / 48 V / 72 V

Screw terminal
DC 48 V/ 20 A 722812 CPSB3-960-48 1
DC 72 V/ 13.3 A 722813 CPSB3-960-72 1
Input CPSB3-960-24 CPSB3-960-48 CPSB3-960-72

Internal fuse –
Dimensions Power Factor Correction P.F.C. >0.6
Output
Rated current output 40 A 20 A 13.3 A
Max. output current >56 A, 5 s, @ 24 V >28 A, 5 s, @ 48 V >18.6 A, 5 s, @ 72 V
Short-circuit current >90 A, 5 s >70 A, 5 s >40 A, 5 s
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
PIN assignment Load regulation <2 % <1.5 % <1 %
Rise time –
Status indication DC ON LED green ≥21.6 V ≥43.2 V ≥64.8 V
Status indication DC LOW LED red ≤21.6 V ≤43.2 V ≤64.8 V
Efficiency >94 %
Low power loss <61 W
Rated over load protection > 90°C, auto-reset
Over voltage protection <33 V <60 V <94 V
Derating Short circuit characteristics Hiccup mode, 5 s ON / 10 s OFF
General
Derating >50 °C: -15 W / °C, UL 508: >45 °C: -15 W / °C
Redundant operation M.T.B.F. >500000 h to SN29500 / >150000 h to MIL standard HDBK 217F
Cooling Natural air cooling, forced cooling >50°C, 50 mm distance above/below
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4, EN 50178, EN
61558, EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 55022 Class B
Monitoring
3.42
·
Redundant module 12 to 85 V, 50 A
Potential-free signalling contact
Status LED per input

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 12 V–85 V/50 A 722999 CPSRM50 1
Input CPSRM50
Nominal voltage –
Operation voltage range DC 12–85 V
Inputs 2
Rated current max. 50 A per input
Internal fuse –
Dimensions External fuse –
Output
Rated voltage output –
Rated current output –
Max. output current 300 A
Voltage drop <0,2 V
Inverse voltage –
Low power loss Max. 10 W
No-load power <1,5 W
PIN assignment Status indication DC ON LED green IN1, IN2 OK
Status indication DC ON LED red Redundancy error
Overtemperature protection No
Over voltage protection No
General
Derating –
M.T.B.F. –
Use
Pollution degree 2
Termination Input: pluggable screw connection: 0,2–16 mm2
Output: pluggable screw connection: 0,2–16 mm2
Relay: pluggable screw connection: 0,2–1,5 mm2
Approvals UL, cUL: UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1 recognised
CE: EN 55022 Class B, EN 55024
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/6/8, EN 61204-3
Monitoring
DC ON Control (Rdy) N/O contact
Switching voltage Ac 300 V/DC 24 V
3.43
·

Output: DC 24 V, 100 A / DC 48 V, 50 A

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V/100 A 722814 CPSB3-2400-24 1
DC 48 V/50 A 722816 CPSB3-2400-48 1
Input DC 24 V/100 A DC 48 V/50 A

Operation voltage range AC 340 V–550 V/DC 520 V–750 V
Rated current Ui= AC 400 V: 4,5 A / Ui= AC 500 V: 3,5 A
Inrush current <AC 10 A (active inrush current limitation)
Internal fuse –
External fuse Automat: 3 × C 10 A (mandatory)
Power Factor Correction P.F.C. >0,92
Range of functions Input protection Surge protection according to VDE 0160, over/undervoltage (auto restart)
The new power compact series Phase monitoring (reduced output power): PFC error
provides a number of additional Output
adjustment options via function Rated voltage output DC 24 V DC 48 V
keys. The selected functions
are shown on a display. In addi-
tion, the current output voltage Max. output current >150 A, 5 s, mit Uout>90 % >75 A, 5 s, mit Uout>90 %
and current are displayed for Short-circuit current 150 A, 5 s 75 A, 5 s
normal operation. Voltage trim range DC 11,5–29 V DC 23–56 V
Input protection Load regulation <1 %
• Active Surge suppressor and Rise time <4,5 s
inrush limiter (ASSIL) as pro- Temperature coefficient –
tection against overvoltages Ripple & Noise <200 mV
according to VDE 0160
• PFC error monitoring
• Phase monitoring with auto- Status indication DC ON LED green alphanumeric display
matic reduction of the output Status indication DC LOW LED red alphanumeric display
power Parallel/redundant operation max. 4 devices
• Automatic start/restart system Efficiency >92 %
for over- and undervoltages Low power loss <200 W
Output protection Over voltage protection >30 V
• Adjustable current limiting Short circuit characteristics adjustable: Hiccup, current limiting
between 0.1 IN and IN
General
• Hiccup autoreset based on
current limiting or maximum
output voltage (150%) Insulation voltage input / ground AC 1.5 kVeff
Status display and signal Insulation voltage output / ground AC 0.5 kVeff
• In addition to an LED for “DC Operation temperature range -20 °C – 60 °C (derating)
OK” and error displays, the Derating >45 °C: -40 W/°C
devices have the following Storage temperature range -25 °C – 85 °C
analog outputs 0–10 V and M.T.B.F. >500000 h to SN29500 / >150000 h to MIL standard HDBK 217F
4–20 mA as direct function of Dimensions (w × h × d) in mm 233.0 × 158.0 × 102.0
the load current
Cooling Natural air cooling, forced cooling >45°C, 80 mm distance top/bottom, 10 mm side
• Programmable relay contact
with the functions Housing material Aluminium
– Output voltage/current, Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
– Overload, Installation postition vertical
– Overtemperature Protection class IP 20 (IEC529, EN60529)
Additional functions IP rating I (SELV, PELV)
• Temperature-compensated Overvoltage category II
battery charging function Pollution degree 2
• Display and compensation of
the voltage drop for long
cables Termination Screw connection: input 0.2–4.0 mm/output 0.2–35 mm2/auxiliary 0.2–1.5 mm2
• Remote On/Off of the output Approvals Standards: UL 508, IEC 950, EN 60950, EN 55011
voltage CE: EN 61000-4-5, Surge immunity level IV, VDE 0160
• DC 12 V auxiliary voltage CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11
• Monitoring and control inter- Monitoring
face based on RS232 (optio- DC ON Control (Rdy) Relay, N/O contact active, adjustable, DCok: 90–110 % Uset, ACok: acc. input
nal) voltage range, overload
• Integrated O-ring diode Overtemperature range, charging complete
• Load sharing in parallel ope- Switching capacity AC/DC 30 V, 1 A, 30 W
ration Insulation voltage AC 500 V
• Load current sharing Output current galvanically isolated: 0–10 V and 4–20 mA
Interface
User Interface LCD display 16 × 2 character, multi language, 4 keys (command and navigation)
Auxiliary voltage output galvanically isolated DC 12 V, 100 mA
NTC Temperature-controlled battery charging (mandatory)
3.44
·

Output: DC 24 V, 100 A / DC 48 V, 50 A
Dimensions PIN assignment
Serial operation Parallel/redundant mode
Charging operation Output voltage in 0–10 V Output voltage in 4–20 mA
3.45
·

Output: DC 24 V, adjustable

Output voltage/current DC 24 V/ 5 A 722794 CPS65-120-24 1
Input CPS65-120-24
Inrush current <AC 20 A
Output
Max. output current 8 A (AC 120 V), 10 A (AC 230 V)
Voltage trim range DC 23–27.5 V
Accuracy –
Line regulation –
Rise time –
PIN assignment Temperature coefficient –
Ripple & Noise <80 mV (AC 120 V), < 50 mV (AC 230 V)
Low power loss 18.6 W (AC 120 V); 12.6 W (AC 240 V)
General
Redundant operation Switching frequency approx. 70 – 110 kHz
Derating –
Pollution degree 2
CE: EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/11, EN 61000-6-2, EN 601000-6-4,
EN 50178, EN 61558, EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 61000-3-2
Monitoring
3.46
Notes
3.47
Modular, flexible and safe: LOC C
The intelligent LÜTZE Overload
Adjustable rated current (1A – 10A)
Adjustable characteristic
(fast- … slow acting)
“Power-ON”-effect to switch
on capacitive loads
Single or centralized fault indication
Non-volatile store of the last status
Spring terminals
Small device – width 8,1mm
Response time independent

of temperature
Contact slots for each potential usable

for jumper combs
C C-Box / LOCC-Box-Net
Current Control System
Remote ON / OFF
Manual ON / OFF
Status indication
“operation”, “fault”, “90% load”
and “100% load”
Adjustments can be sealed

by standard seal wire
flammability class UL-94-V0;

NFF I2,F2
Uninterruptible supply via Copper bar

and contact slide
Option: One wire bus interface (716410)
UL 508
The picture shows 5 x LOCC Box incl. Supply Set

·
Electronic load monitoring up to DC 10 A

Single-channel design, Adjustable current range: DC 1 A – 10 A
Adjustable characteristics, fast, medium-speed, slow 1, -2, -3

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716400 LOCC-Box-FB 7-6400 1
DC 12 / 24 V 716401 LOCC-Box-FB 7-6401 1
DC 12 / 24 V 716401.0050 LOCC-Box-FB 7-6401 50
Input LOCC-Box-FB 7-6400 LOCC-Box-FB 7-6401

Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V
Operation voltage range DC 10 V – 32 V
Rated current DC 10 A
Supply current DC 40 A over Cu-rails 10 × 3 mm
Reverse voltage protection internal electronics
Termination screwless disconnect slide
Control input (Set / Reset)
Dimensions Signal level DC 12 / 24 V (EN 61131)
OFF Pulse with falling edge >100 ms, <800 ms
ON Pulse with falling edge > 1 s
Output
Switching element MosFet
Output current max. DC 10 A
Voltage drop <170 mV (10 A)
Status Indication LED green: Operating voltage present, no error
LED red: Error in load circuit
Switch-on capacity 10000 µF
Current range 1 A – 10 A (adjustable via switch in 1 A steps)
Characteristic fast-acting (1), medium-slow (2), slow 1 (3), slow 2 (4), slow 3 (5)
Signal output
PIN assignment Signal level DC 12/24 V: operating voltage on stand- DC 12/24 V: operating voltage on stand-
7 1
DC 24V
6 2
Load +
Set /
by, no error, DC 0 V: error, output swit- by, no error, DC 0 V: error, output swit-
DC 24V
3 Reset
Status
ched off ched off and manual "OFF"
5 C-Control 4
0V NC Switching element Transistor, collector with pull-up resistance
General
1: + Output
2: Control input (Set/Reset) Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94-V0; NFF I2, F2)
3: Status output
4: NC Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
5: 0V
6: + Supply (alternative) Protection class IP 20
7: + Supply
Signal output Termination Spring terminal 0.25–2.5 mm2
Approvals cULus
Standards EN 60950-1; EN 61131-1,2; EN 61000; EN 60947-4-1; EN 55022
0 V collective terminal 716420 LOCC Box-SK 7-6420 2
Supply terminal with cutout for cop- 716421 LOCC Box-EKL 7-6421 2
per rail to increase current
Distance terminal without contact 716422 LOCC Box-DKL 7-6422 2
LOCC Box empty housing without 716424 LOCC Box-DY 7-6424 2
terminal
Supply kit (supply and end termi- 716425 LOCC Box ES 7-6425 1
nals)
Jumper comb, 8-pin, 6 A white 716428 LOCC Box BKW 7-6428 5
Jumper comb, 8-pin, 6 A red 716429 LOCC Box BKR 7-6429 5
Jumper comb, 8-pin, 6 A blue 716430 LOCC Box BKB 7-6430 5
Jumper comb, 16-pin, 6 A red 716440 LOCC Box BKB 7-6440 5
Jumper comb, 16-pin, 6 A blue 716439 LOCC Box BKR 7-6439 5
Tag holder (quantity 200) white (5×5 mm) 716431 LOCC Box BZW 7-6431 1
Tag holder (quantity 200) red (5×5 mm) 716432 LOCC Box BZR 7-6432 1
Tag holder (quantity 200) blue (5×5 mm) 716433 LOCC Box BZB 7-6433 1
Tag holder (quantity 200) yellow (5×5 mm) 716434 LOCC Box BZG 7-6434 1
Tag holder white (39.3×5 mm) 716443 LOCC Box BZW 7-6443 20
Cover for tag holder 716443 transparent 716444 LOCC Box-BAD 7-6444 20
A4 label sheets (quantity 240) white 716445 LOCC Box-LEB 7-6445 10
Tag holder (quantity 50), printing 1– white 716446 LOCC Box BZW 7-6446 1
50
Copper rail, 1 m 716426 LOCC Box CU 7-6426 1
CU rail cover, 1 m 716427 LOCC Box AD 7-6427 1
3.50
·


Spring terminal
Input LOCC-Box-FB 7-6403

Signal level DC 12 / 24 V (EN 61131)
OFF Low level (falling edge)
Dimensions ON High level (rising edge)
Output
Characteristic fast (1), middle (2), slow 1 (3), slow 2 (4), slow 3 (5), adjustable via switch
Signal output
Signal level DC 24 V: operating mode, no error, DC 0 V: error, output switched off
Switching element Transistor, collector with pull-up resistance
7 1
DC 24V Load +
6 2 Set / Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94-V0; NFF I2, F2)
DC 24V Reset
3
Status Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
5 C-Control 4
0V NC
1: + Output Installation postition Optional
2:
3:
Control input (Set/Reset)
Status output
4:
5:
NC
0V
6:
7:
+ Supply (alternative)
+ Supply
Signal output Weight (kg/piece) 0.120
Approvals cULus
terminal
nals)
50
3.51
·


Spring terminal
Input LOCC-Box-FB 7-6404

OFF Low level (falling edge)
Dimensions ON High level (rising edge)
Output
Characteristic fast (1), middle (2), slow 1 (3), slow 2 (4), slow 3 (5), adjustable via switch
Signal output
Signal level DC 24 V: operating mode, no error, DC 0 V: error, output switched off
Switching element Transistor, collector with pull-up resistance
7 1
DC 24V Load +
6 2 Set / Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94-V0; NFF I2, F2)
DC 24V Reset
3
Status Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
5 C-Control 4
0V NC
1: + Output Installation postition Optional
2:
3:
Control input (Set/Reset)
Status output
4:
5:
NC
0V
6:
7:
+ Supply (alternative)
+ Supply
Signal output Weight (kg/piece) 0.120
Approvals cULus
terminal
nals)
50
Comments
The triggered output can only be acknowledged via the device switch.
3.52
·
Electronic load monitoring up to DC 10 A, with communication

Single-channel design, programmable, Adjustable current range: DC 1 A – 10 A

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716410 LOCC-Box-Net 7-6410 1
DC 12 / 24 V 716410.0050 LOCC-Box-Net 7-6410 50
Input LOCC-Box-Net 7-6410

Supply current DC 40 A over Cu rail 10 × 3 mm
Dimensions OFF Pulse with falling edge >100 ms, <800 ms
ON Pulse with falling edge > 1 s
Output
Characteristic fast-acting (1), medium-slow (2), slow 1 (3), slow 2 (4), slow 3 (5), programmable
(10)
Signal output
PIN assignment Signal level DC 12/24 V: Operating voltage present, no error; DC 0 V: error, output switched
7 1
DC 24V
6 2
Load +
Set /
off, programmable
DC 24V
3 Reset
Status Switching element Transistor, collector with pull-up resistance
5 C-Control 4
0V Com General
1: + Output
Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94-V0; NFF I2, F2)
2: Control input (Set/Reset) Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
3: Status output
4: 1 Wire bus (Communication) Protection class IP 20
5: 0V
6: + Supply (alternative) Installation postition Optional
7: + Supply
Signal output Operation temperature range -25 °C – 50 °C
Approvals cULus
terminal
nals)
50
3.53
LOCC-Box / LOCC-Box-Net • Characteristic Curves
All device variants incorporate the same characteristics
Extensible
Customer specific characteristics - parameterisable with LOCC-Box-Net
Switch position 1: Characteristic fast Switch position 2: Characteristic medium
Time (ms)
Time (ms)
Current (A) Current (A)
Switch position 3: Characteristic slow-1 Switch position 4: Characteristic slow-2

Time (ms)
Time (ms)
Current (A) Current (A)
Switch position 5: Characteristic slow-3

Time (ms)
Current (A)
3.54
·
Gateway for LOCC-Box-Net (716410)

Input: LOCCbus (LIN)
Output: USB, RS 232, CANopen

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716459 LOCC-Box-GW 7-6459 1
Input LOCC-Box-GW 7-6459

Bus system LOCCbus, basic LIN
Access method Single-Master - Multiple Slave
Bus technology Line
Physical level 1-wire
Participants 40, max. 254
Bus length max. 40 m
Transfer rate 9600 Baud
Data rate 8 Bit + fixed parity
Transfer protocol Modified multi-drop
Dimensions Output USB RS232 CANopen
Bus system USB 2.0 Full-Speed RS232 CANopen
Transfer rate 12 Mbit/s 600 – 11500 bit/s 10 – 1000 kbit/s
General
Operation voltage range DC 10 V – 26.4 V
Rated current max. 50 mA
Reverse voltage protection Yes
Status Indication LED 1 green/red: USB, RS232, Firmware; LED 2 green/red: CANopen
Insulation voltage 1.0 kV
PIN assignment Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Termination Spring terminal : 0.14 - 2.5 mm2 (with AE 1.5 mm2)
Approvals CE
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61131-1, -2, EN 60898, EN 60947-4-1, EN 50081
Labels for laser printer A4 unpun- 681031 LEB - A4 1
ched
3.55
Load monitoring · Gateway

Output: USB, PROFINET-IO

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716457 LOCC-Box-GWPN 0-6457 1
Input
Bus technology Line
Participants typ. 40, max. 100
Data rate 8 Bit + fixed parity (Bit 9)
Dimensions Output USB PROFINET-IO
Bus system USB 2.0 Full-Speed PROFINET-IO
Transfer rate 12 Mbit/s 100 bit/s (IEE 802.3)
Interface Port_1, Port_2, 2 × RJ-45 female with
USB connector, Type B
galvanic isolation and LEDs
General
Operation voltage range 10 – 32 V
Rated current 120 mA @ 24 V
Status Indication LED F, yellow - flashing: identification prompt (PROFINET)
LED E, red - flashing: no connection (PROFINET)
PIN assignment LED P, green - flashing: operating voltage is connected (POWER)
LED C, green - flashing: data traffic with LOCC Box Net modules (LOCCbus)
Link: yellow - 100Base/T-connection
Activity green - valid connection, blanking: data traffic
Housing material PA
Field installation Snaps on to TS 35 rail (EN 50022)
Relative humidity max. 90 % non-condensed
Approvals CE
Comments
Screw terminal on request
Use
3.56
·

Output: USB, PROFIBUS-DP

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716458 LOCC-Box-GW/PB 0-6458 1
Input
Bus technology Line
Dimensions Output USB PROFIBUS-DP
Bus system USB 2.0 Full-Speed PROFIBUS-DP
Transfer rate 12 Mbit/s max. 12 Mbit/s
Interface Port_1, SUB-D 9pin with galvanic
isolationg
General
Status Indication LED D, green - on: data exchange via PROFIBUS-DP
LED E, red - different flash codes for diagnosis of PROFIBUS-DP faults
PIN assignment LED P, green - on: operating voltage is supplied (POWER)
LED C, green - flashing: data traffic with LOCC-Box-Net modules (LOCCbus)
Housing material PA 6.6 (UL 94 V0)
Approvals CE
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61131-1, EN 61000, EN 60947-4-1, EN 50016
Comments
Use
3.57
Load monitoring · Gateway

Output: USB, EtherCAT

Spring terminal
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716456 LOCC-Box-GWPN 0-6456 1
Input
Bus technology Line
Dimensions Output USB EtherCAT
Bus system USB 2.0 Full-Speed EtherCAT
Transfer rate 12 Mbit/s 100 bit/s (IEE 802.3)
Interface IN, OUT, 2 × RJ-45 female with galvanic
isolation and LEDs
General
Status Indication LED L, red - flashing: EEPROM error, EEPROM not loaded
LED R, green - lit: ECT Run
PIN assignment LED E, green - lit: ECT error
LED C, green - flashing: data traffic with LOCC Box-Net modules (LOCCbus)
link/activity: green - 100Base/T-connection, flashes with EtherCAT traffic
Connect: yellow - speed LED,100Base/T-connection
Housing material PA
Approvals CE
Comments
Use
3.58
· Accessories
LOCC Box supply set

consisting of supply terminal and end block
maximum total current 40 A
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716425 LOCC-Box-ES 7-6425 1
Input LOCC-Box-ES 7-6425

Rated current max. DC 40 A
Reverse voltage protection No
Termination Spring terminal : 0.33 – 10 mm2 (AWG 22–8)
conductor connection cross section, single wire (solid): max. 10 mm2
conductor connection cross section, fine wire: max. 6 mm2
conductor connection cross section, fine wire with AEH: max. 6 mm2
Length of stripped insulation 12 mm
Output
Dimensions
Termination screwless disconnect slit
Copper bus bar 3 × 10mm
General
Approvals cURus
Standards –
3.59
· Accessories
LOCC Box supply terminal

Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716435 LOCC-Box-EKL 7-6435 2
Input LOCC-Box-EKL 7-6435

Output
Dimensions
General
Approvals cULus
Standards –
3.60
· Accessories
LOCC Box end block
Nominal voltage AC 115 / 230 V 716436 LOCC-Box-EB 7-6436 2
General
Approvals cULus
Dimensions Standards –
3.61
· Accessories

Break out for copper bus bar for increased current
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716421 LOCC-Box-EKL 7-6421 2
Input LOCC-Box-EKL 7-6421

Output
Dimensions
General
Approvals cURus
Standards –
Use
3.62
· Accessories
0V Collective Terminal
Single-channel design
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716420 LOCC-Box-SK 7-6420 2
Input LOCC-Box-SK 7-6420

Rated current 6× max. DC 10 A
Connection 1–6
Output
Voltage drop –
Dimensions Connection 7
General
Approvals –
Standards –
PIN assignment
3.63
· Accessories

LOCC Box supply terminal with outage
Nominal voltage DC 12 / 24 V 716437 LOCC-Box-ES 7-6437 1
Input LOCC-Box-ES 7-6437

Output
Dimensions
General
Approvals cULus
Standards –
3.64
·
AC/DC Load monitoring with fuse (5 × 20 mm)

Monitoring circuits 2.5 A und 6.3 A
Group signal using potential-free relay contact (only 716123)

Load monitoring 6×2.5 A
Termination 716123 SIPE-6LED-6123 DC 24 V 1
Load monitoring 4×6.3 A
Termination 710820 SIPE-4-0820 AC/DC 250 V 2
Input 716123 710820

Nominal voltage DC 24 V AC/DC 230 V
Rated current 6 × DC 2.5 A 4 × DC 6.3 A
Fuse Glass tube 5x20 mm, not included in delivery
Resistor <0.1 Ω
150 V 300 V
Dimensions 50178)
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category I
Signal circuit
Switching element Relay –
Contact type 1 change over contact –
Min. switching voltage AC/DC 17 V –
Max. switching voltage AC/DC 250 V –
Min. switching current AC/DC 0.10 mA –
Max. switching current AC/DC 3 A –
Switch-on delay 8 ms –
Switch-off delay 8 ms –
Switching capacity max. 1250 VA –
Contact material AgNi –
Mechanical service life 2 × 107 operations –
250 V
40178)
>2 mm –
(contol/load side)
General
Form Varioprint
PIN assignment
716123 Field installation rail TS 35 (EN 50022)
Insulation voltage input/output –
Safe isolation –
Dimensions (w × h × d) 65.0 × 77.0 × 63.0 mm 22.5 × 77.0 × 63.0 mm
Weight (kg/piece) 0.116 0.070
Approvals –
Accessories Article number Description PU
Identification unit 710799 100
710820
3.65
· DC/DC converter
DC/DC converter, 1-channel

Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V / 10 V / 5 V

Screw terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V, 30 mA 762185 CV 7-2185 DC24V/24V 1
DC 10 V, 100 mA 762184 CV 7-2184 DC24V/10V 1
Spring terminal
Output voltage/current DC 24 V, 30 mA 762186 CV 7-2186 DC24V/24V 1
DC 10 V, 100 mA 762084 CV 7-2084 DC24V/10V 1
Input 762185/762186 762184/762084

Operation voltage range DC 16.8–30 V
Inrush current –
Internal fuse –
Dimensions External fuse –
Output DC 24 V DC 10 V DC 5 V
Rated current output 30 mA 100 mA 150 mA
Voltage trim range 24 V 9 – 11 V 5V
Rise time –
Ripple & Noise <10 mV eff
Hold up time <10 ms
Status indication DC ON LED green –
PIN assignment Status indication DC LOW LED red –
Parallel/redundant operation No
Efficiency >85 %
Low power loss –
Over voltage protection –
Übertemperaturschutz –
General
Insulation voltage input/output 0.1
Insulation voltage input / ground –
Derating –
M.T.B.F. –
Application height –
Protection class IP 20 (IEC 529, EN 60529)
IP rating –
Overvoltage category –
Pollution degree –
Approvals –
6 A jumper comb red 762802 762805 762812 762822 762832 10
Labels for laser printer A4 unpun- 681031 LEB-A4 1
ched
3.66
Notes
3.67
4. Ethernet Connectivity
Ethernet Connectivity
Industrial Ethernet Connectivity

As an expert partner to industrial automation, Lütze offers a
comprehensive product portfolio of switches, media converters, Contents
Ethernet bus cables and termination systems.
Product Overview
Switches ET Series
• 10/100/1000 MBit Basics: Ethernet
• Power over Ethernet Connectivity
• Fibre-optic technology with single- and multi-mode
• Extended temperature range
• Redundant supply Unmanaged Switches
• Metal housing 5 port
• Broadcast current protection
8 port
• Frame transfer up to 9 kB
• Autonegotiation 16 port
• UL listed 4 + 1.2 FX
Switches DIOswitch Series Unmanaged Switches, PoE

• IP 67 5 port
• Store and Forward Splitter
• Profinet Conformance Class CC-A
• Extended temperature range Unmanaged Switch IP67
8 port
Media converter
• 10/100/1000 MBit Media converter
• Single and multi-mode operation 10/100 MBit
• Redundant supply
• Metal housing Ethernet cable
• UL listed Standard
Suitable for C-tracks
Ethernet cable Patch cable
• Cat 5e, Cat 6, Cat 7
• Suitable for C-tracks Ethernet termination
• PUR, PVC Industrial connectors Cat 5e, 6
• Patch cable
Module racks Cat 6
• UL listed
Wall ducts Cat 5e, 6
Ethernet termination Crimping tools
• Protection IP 20 and IP 67
Ethernet Glossary
• Suitable for the various field bus protocols
• Connectors
• Module racks
• Wall ducts
• Installation tools
4.1
Ethernet Connectivity · Product Overview
Unmanaged Switches
5 port 5 port 8 port 8 port 16+2G port 4+1,2 FX port

10/100 Mbit 10/100/1000 Mbit 10/100 Mbit 10/100/1000 Mbit 10/100/1000 Mbit 10/100 Mbit
Unmanaged Switches, PoE
5 port Splitter
Page 4.16 Page 4.17
Media Converter
10/100 Mbit 1000 Mbit
Page 4.18 Page 4.19
Ethernet Cable
Standard C-tracks Patch cable IP20 Patch cable IP67 Patch cable IP67 Patch cable IP67
compatible GOF POF GOF POF
SCRJ/SC-Duplex SCRJ/SCRJ (V6) SCRJ/SCRJ (V6) SCRJ/SCRJ (V14)
4.2
Ethernet Connectivity · Product Overview
Connection Technology
Industrial Module racks Wall ducts

Connectors Cat 6 Cat 5e, Cat 6
Cat 5e, Cat 6
Page 4.29 Page 4.31 Page 4.33
4.3
LÜTZE – Ethernet Connectivity
LÜTZE Ethernet Connectivity - Solutions from a single source A network in which each node is assigned exactly one port of a switch is
The requirements placed on efficient manufacturing systems are becoming called switched Ethernet. Ethernet switches are used to resolve collision
more and more complex. Increased networking between production and domains into simple point-to-point connections between the switch and the
management means that more and more automation systems are requiring other network nodes (terminals, infrastructure components).
the use of PC-based controllers and Ethernet communication networks.
Ethernet is the name of a widely used, standardised communication infra- Ethernet Switches
structure with various communication media. Together with higher-level Simple switches work on the data link layer (OSI model, link 2), and can
communication software, Ethernet is today the basis for a large number of connect LANs with differing physical characteristics. If all of the protocols of
industrial local networks. In contrast to the office environment, communica- OSI- Classifi- DoD- Classification Protocol Units Coupling
tion in automation technology requires open, transparent system solutions. Layer cation Layer Example elements
The seamlessness of information is a major priority here. This means that it
7 Application HTTP
is necessary to plan, install and administer industrial networks in such a Appli--
Appli Appli-
Appli- FTP
way that they function reliably under the toughest conditions and in the 6 P
Presentation
resentation cation
cation cation HTTPS Data
harshest environments, while exhibiting controllable behaviour. The correct ori
orientated
entated SMTP Gateway,
Gateway,
LDAP Content-
selection of suitable cables, connection technology and components is thus 5 Session
End to NCP Switch,
a significant factor in reliability. In this area LÜTZE offers a seamless sys- End Layer 4-7-
tem for designing network infrastructures. (Multihop) TCP Switch
Trans- UDP
4 Transport Segments
port SCTP
Office SPX
ICMP Router,
3 Network
Network Internet IGMP Pakets Layer-3-
IP Switch
IP20 Area Transport IPX
Media Converter LWL/Tx orientated Point to
Point
2 Data Link
Data Link Frames
Frames Bridge,
Patch Cable Ethernet Switch
RJ45/RJ45 Web Token Ring
Straight entry FDDI
Ethernet IO
ARCNET Hub,
2
4
1
3
5
6
1 Physical Bits
LÜTZE ETHERNET BUS Repeater
HUB
picture : ISO / OSI Reference Model

SWITCH
IP67 Area the upper layers in the network are the same, then the switch is protocol-
LÜTZE ETHERNET BUS transparent. When a packet is received, the switch processes the 48-bit
Machine long MAC-address and creates an entry for it in the SAT (Source Address
C-Track
Ethernet Table), which stores, in addition to the MAC address, the physical Port at
LÜTZE SUPERFLEX
Sensor which it is received. Each port of a switch constitutes a separate network
ETHERNET BUS segment, with the entire network bandwidth being available to each of
SWITCH IP67
these segments. Each individual port of a switch can receive and transmit
data. The speed required for this is achieved via an internal high-speed bus
Thanks to our many years of experience in the planning and implementa- (backplane). Data buffers ensure that as far as possible no data pack-
tion of industrial networks and the necessary components, we are also able ets are lost.
to develop customer-specific solutions to satisfy your requirements optimally. As a result, the network performance is increased not only in the network
as a whole, but also in the individual segments. Switches examine each
Ethernet in industrial applications incoming data packet for the MAC address of the target segment, and can
In industry, communication takes place in a hierarchical system consisting forward it there directly. The particular advantage of switches is their ability
of plant, management and field levels. The use of Ethernet is standard at to connect ports with each other directly, i.e. being able to establish dedicat-
plant and management levels. At field level, field buses such as Profibus ed links. Switches break the Ethernet bus structure down into a bus and
DP, CAN or other protocol variants are still dominant. The reason for this is star structure. Sub-segments with a bus structure are now coupled in a star
the considerably higher or differing requirements at field level. Here the net- pattern, each via one port of the switch. Packets can be transmitted
work encounters interference factors that can have a significant effect on between the individual ports at the maximum Ethernet speed.
transmission quality. The risk of interference due to vibrations, dirt, moisture Another major advantage is simultaneous data transmission between differ-
or harmful substances is especially high at the connection points. To meet ent segments. This increases the bandwidth in the entire network.
However, to make use of the full performance capability of the switch tech-
Switched Ethernet INFO nology it is necessary to implement a suitable network topology. This
requires distributing the data load as evenly as possible among the individ-
In industrial applications, the following transmission requirements apply: ual ports. Furthermore, it is advisable to connect systems that communicate
• very high network availability a great deal with
• small data packets
• timely transmission
Routing Table Device MAC Port
In order to cope with these requirements, the network has to be
subdivided into logical and physical segments. This makes it possi-
ble in most cases to limit communication links between network Frame Filtering
nodes to a sub network, without affecting the bandwidth of other
sub networks. The load sharing means that the full bandwidth is
available in each segment. Port 1 Buffer Port 2
picture : General functionality of a switch

these requirements, LÜTZE supplies a solution that will stand up to the
sometimes adverse conditions encountered in light and heavy industry, rail- LAN 1
way tunnels, on board ships, or in other environments. Device Device Device Device
The simplest form of load sharing is achieved through the use of switches.
4.4
Cables - A lot depends on them CAT 2 - Class B

The classical Ethernet began with the coaxial cable. Today, new installa- CAT 2 cables are suitable for maximum frequencies up to 1 or 1.5 MHz;
tions use only symmetric cables, so-called balanced cables, or fibre-optic they are used, for example, for cabling in buildings with an ISDN primary
cables. multiplex connection.
Copper cables CAT 3 - Class C

Various types of copper cable are used. The term "symmetric cable" does The 100BASE-T4 standard allows 100 Mbit/s over existing Category 3
not refer to the structure of the cable, but rather exclusively to its electrical installations, using all four conductor pairs. CAT 3 cables are no longer
characteristics and the signal transmission. The symmetrical transmission used in new installations; rather at least CAT 5 cables are used.
of a signal requires two conductors; full duplex thus requires four conduc-
tors. A 10/100 MB Ethernet cable that is suitable for industrial use will thus CAT 5 - Class D
have at least four conductors. The number of conductors increases by CAT 5 cables are most often encountered in installations today; they are
another four if the application requires 1Gbit. used for signal transmission at high data transmission rates. Their specific
standardised designation is EIA/TIA-568. CAT 5 cables are intended for
Twisted-Pair operating frequencies up to 100 MHz. Due to the high signal frequencies,
In order to obtain the best possible interference suppression, the individual particular care must be taken during laying and assembly, especially for the
conductors have to be twisted. For different requirements, regarding the connection points of the conductors. Category 5 cables are often used in
transmission, different types of twisted pair cables were developed. The dif- structured cabling for computer networks, such as Fast Ethernet or Gigabit
ference between this cables is the shield : Ethernet. This has been encouraged by the widespread use of 1000BASE-
• UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair): T (Gigabit Ethernet), because it requires only one CAT 5 cable.
The twisted signal pairs are stranded together without any screening
under the outer jacket. CAT 5e - Class De
• Overall shielded S/UTP or F/UTP: The CAT 5e cable is a more specialised version of CAT 5 that is mainly
The twisted pairs are stranded together and surrounded by a common used in German speaking countries in Europe for 100BASE-T network con-
screen made of a metal laminated polymer tape or a copper wire braid. nections over long distances. Carefully executed installations, originally
The outer jacket encloses the screen. made and approved as CAT 5, generally also satisfy the CAT 5e standard.
• Cables with shielded pairs FTP (Foiled Twisted Pair), also U/FTP, The designations EIA/TIA-568A and EIA/TIA-568B are also used informally
S/FTP: Each twisted pair is wrapped by a metallic screen (mostly a metal to mean the two assignments for the colour-coded conductor pairs to the
laminated polymer tape). In Germany often called PiMF (pair in metal foil). connecting contact of the RJ45 connector that are defined in this standard;
In most cases the PiMFs are stranded together and surrounded by a cop in this case, however, this does not say anything about the transmission
per wire braid as a common screen. This provides an optimized EMC per quality.
formance
The short term for shielded twisted pair cable - S/FTP, F/FTP or SF/FTP CAT 6 - Class E
(Screened Foiled Twisted Pair) is used in a different way from various stan- CAT 6 cables are defined by EN50288. CAT 6 cables are intended for
operating frequencies up to 300 MHz. The transmission speed suffers at
INFO longer lengths; however, slight excess lengths may be no problem, depend-
ing on the external influences. Ultimately reliability can be ensured by test-
ing with an appropriate test device to verify compliance with the limit values
of the current versions of EN50173-1, IS 11801 and EIA/TIA 568B2.1. The
fields of application for CAT 6 are voice and data transmission, multimedia
and ATM networks. Greater performance is provided by CAT 6a cables
(500 MHz) according to EIA/TIA 568B2.1 Annex 10d (draft).
LÜTZE Cables of the category LÜTZE cables of the category CAT 7 - Class F
5 offer generally an overall 6 and 7 offer generally pair CAT 7 cables have four individually shielded pairs of conductors
shield as braid (S/UTP). wise shielded conductors with (Screened/Foiled shielded Twisted Pair S/FTP) within an overall shield.
an additional overall shield CAT 7 cables are intended for operating frequencies up to 600 MHz. CAT 7
(copper braid) (S/FTP). cables fulfill the requirements of standard IEEE 802.3an, and are thus suit-
able for 10-Gigabit Ethernet.
dards and various suppliers. In the current EN50173, these cables are des- Wiring Tips
ignated "F" for a foil shield, and "S" for a copper mesh shield. The degree According to the standardised approach, the combination of com¬ponents
of coverage of the braid should be greater than 30% in order to achieve of the same category is expected to achieve the correlating class. But
sufficient shielding against low-frequency fields. New designation according experience reveals that this is not the case, especially when higher trans-
to ISO/IEC-11801 (2002)E is also : S/FTP (meshwork), F/FTP (foil), mission performance is required. Therefore it is recommended to use
SF/FTP (braid+foil). Therefore the letter before the slash describes the matched components from a single source supplier especially in a harsh
overall shield, the letter behind the pair shield. industrial environment.
Components of a higher category meet all the transmission requirements of
Categories and Classes the lower classes. They therefore provide an additional performance mar-
CAT 3,5,6 or 7 describes the categories with regard to the cable and con- gin. For very critical applications (environment, EMC, distances) it is recom-
nector requirements. The transmission bandwidth is de¬termined by the mended to use this margin applying components of a higher category as
cable class (A - 100kHz, B - 1MHz, C - 16MHz, D - 100MHz, E - 300MHz, required. Transmission safety can be achieved by testing the transmission
F - 600MHz). The requirements for the cable are defined in different parts performance using a suitable cabling tester which will verify the limits of the
of the standard EN 50288. The EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11801 describe the appropriate standards EN50173-1, ISO/IEC 11801, resp. EIA/TIA-568B2.1.
installation of cables, connectors, and net structures. Sometimes the terms EIA/TIA-568A and EIA/TIA-568B are used informally
to show the different assignments of the colour coded pairs to the connec-
CAT 1 - Class A tor pins of the RJ45, in this case this is not a statement regarding the trans-
Cat 1 cables are designed for maximum operating frequencies up to 100 mission quality.
kHz, and are thus not suitable for data transmission. They are used for
voice transmission, for example in telephone appli-cations. Only UTP
cables.
4.5
Overview Data Rate / Transmission Medium Pin assignment

The most commonly used Ethernet connector is the so called RJ45 con-
Ethernet Data Rate Transmission Medium IEEE
nector, which is available in shielded and unshielded variants. Of the RJ45
MBit/s connector's eight pins, four are used for 10/100MBit/s, and all eight for
10Base5 10 RG 8 Coaxial Cable 50 Ohm, 802.3 1000MBit/s.
500 m segment length
10Base2 10 RG 85 Coaxial Cable 50 Ohm, 802.3a Pin Belegung RJ45:
500 m segment length PIN-Nr. 10BaseT 100BaseT 1000BaseT
10Broad36 10 Coaxial Cable 75 Ohm, max. 802.3b 1 TD+ (Transmit) TD+ (Transmit) BI_DA+ (Bidirectional)
Expansion 3.600 m 2 TD- (Transmit) TD- (Transmit) BI_DA- (Bidirectional)
10BaseT 10 Twisted Pair Cable, Kat 3, 802.3i 3 RD+ (Recieve) RD- (Recieve) BI_DB+ (Bidirectional)
100 m segment length 4 - - BI_DC+ (Bidirectional)
10BaseFL 10 Multi Mode Fibre, 850 nm 5 - - BI_DC- (Bidirectional)
2.000 m segment length 6 RD- (Receive) RD- ( Receive) BI_DB- (Bidirectional)
10BaseFB 10 Multi Mode Fibre 850 nm 7 - - BI_DD+ (Bidirectional)
2.000 m segment length 8 - - BI_DD- (Bidirectional)
1000BaseT 1000 Twisted Pair Cable, Kat 5, 802.3ab
100 m segment length
1000BaseSX 1000 Multi Mode Fibre, 830 nm 802.3z Colour coded according to EN 50173 - hard wiring
550 m segment length In the EN 50173 standard, two colour codings are defined for installa-
tion, namely T568A and T568B. The user is free to choose between
1000BaseLX 1000 Multi Mode Fibre, 1.270 nm, 802.3z
them, but should ensure during installation that the selected coding is
5.000 m segment length
maintained throughout the entire installation. Mixing the two codings will
1000BaseCX 1000 Twinax-Copper Cable 150 Ohm, 802.3z result in malfunctions
25 m segment length
Ethernet Data Rate Transmission Medium PIN-No. Pair Pair Colour Colour
MBit/s (T568A) (T568B) (T568A) (T568A)
100BaseTX 100 Twisted Pair Cable, Kat 5, 100 m segment length 1 3 2
100BaseT2 100 Twisted Pair Cable, Kat 3, 2 3 2
100 m segment length, 2 x 2 Wire 3 2 3
100BaseT4 100 Twisted Pair Cable, Kat 3, 4 1 1
100 m segment length, 4 x 2 Wire 5 1 1
100BaseFX 100 Multi Mode Fibre, 1.300 nm, 2.000 m 6 2 3
segment length 7 4 4
10GBaseSR 10 Seriell, Multi Mode Fibre, 850 nm, 2.300 m 8 4 4
segment length, without WAN Adjustment
10GBaseSW 10 Serial Fibre Optic, 850 nm, 2.300 m
segment length, with WAN Adjustment
10GBaseLR 10 Serial Fibre Optic, 1.310 nm, 2-10.000 m
10GBaseLW 10 Serial Fibre Optic, 1.310 nm, 2-10.000 m
10GBaseER 10 Serial Fibre Optic, 1.550 nm, 2-40.000 m
10GBaseEW 10 Serial Fibre Optic,1.550 nm, 2-40.000 m PIN Position
10GBaseLX4 10 Serial Fibre Optic, 1.310 nm, 2-10.000 m
WWDM-Technology with 4 Channels
Installation instructions for copper cables INFO Plug in Connector:

• Strip cables for as short a length as possible Plug in Connector IEC Organisation LÜTZE
• Never kink cables by more than 90° Typ Connection 67076-3 106
• Minimum bending radius is four times the diameter RJ45 Bajonet Version 1 IAONA, ODVA
• Do not subject cables to twisting, elongation or tensile loads
RJ45 Snap in Version 2
• Do not crush cables when fastening them
• Apply shielding on the equipotential bonding over a large area, RJ45 Screw Version 3
on both ends and with low impedance RJ45 Push Pull Version 4 PNO
• Apply shielding for several cables at a single point of the equipotential bonding RJ45 with Lock Version 5 PNO
• Do not undo twisting of the individual conductors by more than 13 mm. RJ45 Push Pull Version 6 IAONA, IDA •
The current versions of relevant national and international laws, regulations RJ45 with Lock Version 7 PNO
and standards will always be binding. It may also be necessary to observe RJ45 Screw Version 8
company standards. This then leads to additional requirements for installation, RJ45 Screw Version 9
such as: Design in accordance with DIN EN 50174-1/2/3, Compliance with
EMC Directives EN 55022, EN 50310 and DIN VDE 0878, Secure isolation RJ45 Pulse Lock Version 10
between data and power cables, VDE 0804/DIN57804, Shielding measures, M12 D Screw IEC IAONA, ODVA
VDE 0100, TN-S, Power supply according to TN-S method, Observance of kod 61076-2-101 PNO
the earthing concept according to VDE 0100, Fire regulations, Accident pre- LWL LWL IEC PNO
vention regulations, and perhaps others. 60874-74
4.6
Fibre-optic cables persion. Likewise the entrance angles of the light beams (modes) are
The advantages of fibre-optic cables are clear: wide bandwidth, data different, which leads to differences in the path lengths through the con-
integrity, data security, immunity to interference and larger maximum ductor itself. These processes change the shape of the signal that was
length. They also offer additional interesting benefits compared to originally fed in, which can result in transmission errors. Therefore when
copper-based solutions, such as high quality electrical isolation selecting a cable it is impor-tant to know the bit error performance that
between the individual components, low cable weight per meter, no can be achieved.
electromagnetic radiation, laying directly next to high-energy cables
and the immunity of the bit error rate to any type of electromagnetic
disturbance. • Refractive indices n1, n2 constant
Step Index Fibre • Multimode propagation can appear
Operation of a fibre-optic line thus requires no additional measures • High Dispersion
with regard to shielding, equipotential bonding or overvoltage protec- • 62,5/125 µm and 50/125 µm
tion. The main disadvantages compared to twisted pair cables are the
price and the complicated assembly of the connections. • Refractive indices n1, constant
Grades Index Fibre varies radial
• Multimode propagation can appear
POF • Dispersion lower than step index
One way to bring the costs of assembly down to the same level as with • 62,5/125 µm and 50/125 µm
twisted pairs is the use of POF (Polymer Optical Fibre) technology. This
makes it possible to use economical, easy-to-assemble connectors, and • Refractive indices n1, n2 constant
Singlemode Fibre
preparing the connector interface is only a simple step. Although only • Singlemode propagation only
distances of up to 50 m can be implemented, this provides adequate • very low Dispersion
scope for typical practice-oriented decentralisation of active components. • 9...10/125 µm
HCS Either the so-called bandwidth length product or the bit rate length prod-
If a system requires lines longer than 50 m, HCS (Hard Clad Silica) can uct is used here. The bandwidth (B) depends on the length (L) of the
be used. The cable contains a 200 µm thin glass fibre core with polymer fibre-optic cable, and produces the constant:
cladding, and thus has less attenuation than the polymer fibres. It is pos-
sible to achieve distances of up to 100 m, although the costs of assem- B x L = constant
bly are increased due to the smaller core diameter, due to the more pre-
cise connector mechanism that is required. This constant can be used to calculate the usable bandwidth of a fibre-
optic cable as a function of the transmission distance.
Glass fibre
Glass fibre cables consist of a core and a cladding. A super-thin sili- Multimode
cate or quartz glass fibre is used as the core, this in turn is clad in a
lower-density glass. The difference in density between the two materi- Bandwith:
als results in total reflection of injected light pulses, thus guiding light The bandwith is defined by the time
along the core. distance needed to sissolve two consecu-
tive signals.
Clean data transmission

Refractive Index n2 n1
Modal Bandwith:
Bandwith decreases reciprocal to fibre
length. Thus the modal bandwith is a fibre
specific constant unit: MHz x km.
Step Index Fibre: typ.: 5 - 10 MHz x km Failing data transmission,
Graded Indes Fibre typ.: 200-300 MHz x km signals not repeated
Singlemode Fibre: typ.: > 2 GHz x km
Information is transmitted using infrared light with wavelengths of 850 Because there are multiple possible light paths, the signal is affected
nm, 1300 nm or 1550 nm. With these wavelengths the attenuation is (there are differences in propagation times); for this reason, multimode
especially low - they are also called "optical windows". fibres are not suitable for communication over larger distances at high
bandwidths. Multimode fibres for communication have an inner core diam-
eter of up to 62.5 µm (US standard), and for thinner versions it is only 50
µm (EU standard). However, for both versions the outer diameter is almost
always 125 µm (140 µm for older models). The maximum transmission
distance for multimode is approximately 550 m for a core diameter of 50
µm, and approx. 275 m for 62.5 µm. Newer fibres have lower attenuation
(which has, however, in practice no significance whatsoever for the trans-
mission distance), and allow distances of up to several kilometers (also
depending on the power of the transmitter and the sensitivity of the receiv-
er). Greater ranges cannot, however, be achieved merely with greater
power, but rather there are higher technical requirements which must be
met to shape the light pulses in a highly complex manner. This special
shaping takes into account the modal dispersion (differences in propaga-
Wavelength (nm) tion times for the individual light beams).
The thicker optical fibres for high-powered lasers (here the energy density
The propagation velocity is directly dependent on the wavelength. This in the core of the fibre has to be reduced, because other¬wise it would be
naturally results in differences in propagation times, which are called dis-
4.7
melted or torn) or for lighting (here single-mode operation is not possible In order to prevent damage to fibre-optic cables, whether immediately or
due to the many different wavelengths that have to be transmitted at the during use, great care should be taken when laying them. The VDE laying
same time) and measuring purposes (because here there are often short regulations always apply. In addition, further specifications for indoor and
distances between the detector and the test specimen, and the handling is outdoor laying according to DIN VDE 0899 Part 3 must be observed.
simpler, e.g. beam injection) are in principle multi-mode fibres.
Mono- / Singlemode Fibre-optic cable connectors

In single-mode fibres, the refractive index profile is dimensioned so that the In day-to-day industrial applications, four different types of connector
problem of multiple-path propagation (intermodal dispersion) that arises are mainly used. These are SC, (V)ST, FSMA and MTRJ connectors.
with multi-mode fibres does not occur - in a single-mode fibre the signal Other types of connector, such as ESCON, MIC, Mini-BNC, FC/PV, LC
light propagates in only a single guided waveguide mode, which is why it is or Volition have to date been used on a very small scale.
called single-mode. This allows significantly greater transmission distances
and/or bandwidths. However, there is a different dispersion which becomes
significant: the material dispersion. Here it is understood that due to the The connector used most often in industry is the type SC:
wa¬velength-dependent index of refraction, the speed of light within the
medium is also wavelength-dependent. In practice this means that the light
used for transmission should be as chromatic as possible. This is provided
by laser diodes, which come very close to the ideal. Single-mode fibres,
which are sometimes also called mono-mode fibres, typically have a core
diameter of 9 µm; their outer diameter is likewise 125 µm. The actual trans-
mission of the information takes place in the core of the fibre.
The fact that only laser components with wavelengths greater than 1250
nm are used means that they are still expensive to use. On the other hand,
the bandwidth of 10 GHz/km means that distances of more than 100 km
can be covered.
62,5/125 µm 9/125 µm
Graded Index Fibre Singlemode Fibre
Power over Ethernet

Since 2003 the international standard IEEE 802.3af "DTE Power via MDI"
has existed, which is also called Power over Ethernet (PoE), Power over
LAN (PoL) or Active Ethernet. PoE technology makes it possible to supply
power to low power consumption network nodes directly over the Ethernet
cable. Further¬more, PoE devices can easily be connected to uninterrupti-
ble power supplies. This means that fewer new cables have to be laid and
existing resources can be used more efficiently.
When using PoE it must be ensured that all of the infrastructure compo-
nents present in the network are PoE compatible and that the transmission
Fibre-optic cables suitable for industrial use speed of such networks is limited to 10MBit/s and/or 100MBit/s.
Here two fibres are combined into a cable with a longitudinally water-
tight cladding. The fibres are often clad with aramid or Kevlar yarn for IEEE 802.3af makes a distinction between two core components:
strain relief. For outdoor applications the cables are often also provi-
ded with metal elements to reduce torsion and/or with protection Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE)
against rodents and termites. These devices feed the required power into the network, such as active
network components with direct PoE support or PoE patch panels.
The following basic specifications apply here:
• Halogen-free according to IEC 60754-2 Power Devices (PD)
• Flame-retardant according to IEC 60332-3 (C3) These are units that are supplied remotely and do not have an external
• Low smoke according to IEC 61034 power connection.
For Power Sourcing Equipment, a distinction is made between two types of

Overview fibre optics: device:
Singlemode Multimode HCS POF Endspan Insertion

Fibre PSE devices supply PDs with power directly via their ports, while at the
same time supplying the PDs with data. These devices are almost exclusi-
IEC 60793 B1 A1a A1b A3c A4a
vely switches, such as the Lütze PoE switches 772020 and 772021.
Material glass glass glass glass/ plastic
plastic Midspan Insertion
Ø Core/ These are devices that convey the data of the active devices, while at the
fibre µm 9/125 50/125 62,5/125 200/230 980/1000 same time feeding power into the Ethernet cable. This device category
Attenuation includes splitters, such as Lütze item 772022. These devices are mainly
max. dB/km 1,0 1,5 1,5 10 180 used to upgrade an existing network structure for use.
@nm 1.300 1.300 1300 650 650
Bandwith
max MHz*km 500 500 70 35
Cable length
max. phys. m 10.000 2.000 2.000 100 50
4.8
LÜTZE - Ethernet Connectivity
Ethernet components need power: Power supply via free conductor pairs; Positive and negative volta-
The elimination of local power supplies by use of Power over Ethernet ge sides are transmitted via two conductor pairs
(PoE) can provide significantcost savings with systems such as VoiP, Cannot be used for T4 transmission (Gbit Ethernet)
Web-Cams, embeded PCs, IP sensors, local automation and security
systems.
Endpoint PSE Alternative B.
Power supply via supply sources used; the power supply is looped
Standardised as 802.3af: into the data path
• CAT5 Infrastructure for Data and Power
• Voltage between 44 and 57 Volt
• max. Current 550 mA
• max. Trigger Current 500 mA
• typical Current 10 mA ... 350 mA
• Overload recognition 350 mA - 500 mA
• mind. 5 mA-Idle Current
Midspan PSE, Alternative C.
Comments on wiring the variants

In order to prevent voltage drops, all 4 pairs can be used for the power
supply. The current trend is to make use of the unused conductor
pairs, because this provides better insulation.
Wire Variant A Variant A Variant B

MDI-X MDI AII
Power supply via data cables; Supply via the centre points of the 1 -V Port +V Port
isolating transformer: 2 -V Port +V Port
3 +V Port -V Port
4 +V Port
5 +V Port
6 +V Port -V Port
7 -V Port
8 -V Port
Endpoint PSE Alternative A.
4.9
Ethernet ·
10 / 100 Mbit, autonegotiation, Auto MDI/MDI-X, DC 12 V / 24 V, redundant

5 Fast Ethernet ports, Broadcast storm protection
ESD 4 kV, surge 3 kV, expanded temperature range

5 port, RJ45
Operation temperature range -10 °C – 60 °C 772000 ET-SWU5ST 1
-40 °C – 75 °C 772001 ET-SWU5ET 1
Communication 772000 772001

Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x
LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX
Cable length (segment) Max. 100 m
Rate of transmission Max. 100 Mbps
Connection technology (data) 5 × RJ45
Broadcast Storm Rate Limit 200 pps (200M), 20 pps (10M)
Status Indication P1, P2, P-Fail, 10/100T(x): link/activity, duplex/collision
General
Dimensions Operation voltage range DC 12 V - DC 48 V, redundant
Power comsumption 3W
Operation temperature range -10 °C – 60 °C -40 °C – 75 °C
Relative humidity (operation) 5% - 95% (non-condensing)
Relative humidity (storage) 0% - 95% (non-condensing)
Standards UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950
U.S.A.: FCC Part 15 CISPR 22
EU: EN 55011, EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 Class A, EN 61000-3-2/3, EN 55024, IEC
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Approvals cULus, CE, FCC
Safety
ESD (Ethernet) DD 4 kV
PIN assignment Surge (EFT for power) DC 3 kV
Rated over load protection 0.9 A @ DC 12 V
Mechanics
Field installation Snaps on to TS 35 rail (EN 50022), wall mounting
Installation postition Any
Termination Screw terminal, plug-in: 0.2–2.5 mm2
Monitoring
Power supply voltage
Relay, 1 normally open
monitoring
Switching current 1 A @ DC 24 V
Note
For more information on LED definition, see the data sheet.
4.10
Ethernet ·
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit, autonegotiation, Auto MDI/MDI-X, DC 12 V / 24 V, redundant

5 Fast Ethernet ports, frame transmission up to 9 kB (Jumbo frames)

5 port, RJ45
Operation temperature range -10 °C – 60 °C 772010 ET-SWGU5ST 1
-40 °C – 75 °C 772011 ET-SWGU5ET 1

LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX, 10 / 1000 Base-T
Cable length (segment) Max. 100 m (4-wire Cat.5e, Cat.6 RJ45 cable)
Broadcast Storm Rate Limit 7926 pps
Status Indication P1, P2, P-Fail; 10/100T(x): Link/Activity, Duplex/Collision
General
Dimensions Operation voltage range DC 12 V - DC 48 V, redundant
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.11
Ethernet · Unmanaged switch 8 ports
10 / 100 Mbit, autonegotiation, Auto MDI/MDI-X, DC 12 V / 24 V, redundant

8 Fast Ethernet ports, Broadcast storm protection

8 port, RJ45
Operation temperature range -10 °C – 60 °C 772002 ET-SWU8ST 1
-40 °C – 75 °C 772003 ET-SWU8ET 1
8 port, RJ45

LAN 10 / 100 Base-T(X)
Cable length (segment) Max. 100 m
Dimensions General
Operation voltage range DC 12 V - DC 48 V, redundant
Power comsumption 5W
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
PIN assignment ESD (Ethernet) DD 4 kV
Surge (EFT for power) DC 3 kV
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.12
Ethernet · Unmanaged switch 8 ports

8 Fast Ethernet ports, frame transmission up to 9 kB
ESD 4 kV, Surge 3 kV
Description 8 port, RJ45 772012 ET-SWGU8ST 1
Communication 772012
LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX, 10 / 1000 Base-T
Broadcast Storm Rate Limit 7926 pps
General
Power output –
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.13
Ethernet ·

Simple and flexible expansion to fibre optic with SFP base
Description 16 port 772014 ET-SWGU18ST 1

+ 2G, RJ45/SFP
Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3ab, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3z
LAN 100 Base-TX, 10 / 1000 Base-T, 1000 Base-SX/LX/LHX/XD/ZX/EZX
Rate of transmission Ethernet : 10/100 Mbps, gigabit converter : 10/100/1000 Mbps
Connection technology (data) 16 RJ45 + 2 RJ45/SFP (mini GBIC)
Broadcast Storm Rate Limit –
Status Indication PWR1, PWR2, P-Fail, Gigabit Chopper: Link/Activity, Speed (1000MBps), Gigabit
SFP: Link/Activity
General
Dimensions
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
PIN assignment Approvals cULus, CE, FCC
Safety
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.14
Ethernet · Unmanaged switches 4+1/2FX ports
10/100Base TX, 100Base FX Multi Mode, Auto MDI/MDI-X, DC 12 V / 24 V, redundant

4 Fast Ethernet ports, 1× Multimode SC, 2× Single Mode SC
ESD 4 kV, surge 3 kV, full/half duplex operation, broadcast storm protection
Description 4 port, RJ45, 772005 ET-SWU4-1STSC 1

1 port Multimode
4 port, RJ45, 772007 ET-SWU4-2STS 1
2 port single mode

LAN 10 / 100 Base-T(X), 100 Base FX
Cable length (segment) Copper max. 100 m, multi-mode fibre max. 2000 m
Connection technology (data) 4 × RJ45, 1 × SC or 4 × RJ45, 2 × SC
Dimensions
Fibre-optic cables (Single Mode)
Wavelength 1310 nm
Tx Power -8 / -15 dBm
Rx sensitivity -34 dBm
Parameters 9 / 125 μm
Fibre-optic cables (Multi Mode)
Wavelength 1310 nm
Tx Power -14 / -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity -31 dBm
Parameters 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm
General
Power comsumption 5 W (1SC), 6.5 W (2SC)
PIN assignment
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Rated over load protection 0.9 A @ DC 12 V (1SC), 1.6 A @ DC 12 V (2SC)
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.15
Ethernet · Unmanaged PoE switches 5 ports
10 / 100 MBit, Auto MDI/MDI-X, DC 48 V, redundant

5 Fast Ethernet ports, autonegotiation
ESD 4 kV, Surge 3 kV
Description PoE 5 port, 48 V 772020 ET-PU5ST 1

PoE 5 port, 24/48 V 772021 ET-PU5AST 1

Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3af
LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX
General
Dimensions Operation voltage range DC 48 V redundant DC 24/48 V redundant
Power comsumption 65 W full load PoE 62.5 W full load PoE
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Rated over load protection 15,4 W @ 48 V (per PoE port)
Mechanics
Weight (kg/piece) 0.600 0.800
Monitoring
monitoring
PIN assignment
Note
4.16
Ethernet ·
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit, PoE input and data output

12.95 W with DC 24 V, DC 48 V IN, DC 24 V OUT
IEC 802.3af compatible, -40°C – +75°C, ESD 4 kV, surge 3 kV
Description Power splitter 772022 ET-PSPET 1
Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3af, 802.3ab
LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX, 10 / 1000 Base-T
Cable length (segment) Max. 100 m (4-wire Cat.5e)
Connection technology (data) PoE IN, OUT: RJ 45
Status Indication Power, Link/Activity, Duplex/Collision
General
Operation voltage range DC 44 V - DC 57 V
Dimensions Power comsumption 17.8 W @ 48 V
Power output 12.95 W @ 24 V
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Mechanics
Monitoring
–
monitoring
Note
4.17
Ethernet · Media converter
1×10/100 Mbps RJ45; 1×10/100 Mbps SC, Auto MDI/MDI-X auto crossover
DC 12 V - DC 48 V, redundant
Full/half duplex operation, autonegotiation, ESD 4 kV, surge 3 kV

MM=Multimode, SM=Single Mode
Description Media Converter 772032 MC2032 1
MM
Media Converter 772033 MC2033 1
SM

LAN 10 / 100 Base-TX, 100 Base-FX
Cable length (segment) Ethernet: max. 100 m, Fibre: 2000 m (multimode), 30,000 m (single mode)
Connection technology (data) 1 × RJ45, 1 × SC, 6-pin connector
Status Indication P1, P2, P-Fail, Fibre: HDX/FDX, Link/Activity, Ethernet: 10/100 M, Link/Activity
Dimensions
Wavelength 850 nm –
Tx Power -4/-9.5 dBm –
Rx sensitivity -18 dBm –
Parameters 50 / 125 um, 62.5 / 125 um –
Wavelength – 1310 nm
Tx Power – -3/-9.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity – -20 dBm
Parameters – 9 / 125 um
DIP switch Port / Power Alarm, LFP, Fibre: HDX/FDX, converter/switch
General
PIN assignment Power comsumption Max. 5 W
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Rated over load protection 0.9 A @ DC 12 V, resettable
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.18
Ethernet · Media converter
1×1000 Mbps RJ45, 1×1000 Mbps SC, Auto MDI/MDI-X auto crossover
DC 12 V - DC 48 V, redundant
Full/half duplex operation, autonegotiation, ESD 4 kV, surge 3 kV

MM=Multimode, SM=Single Mode
Description Media Converter 772030 MC2030 1
MM
Media Converter 772031 MC2031 1
SM

Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3ab, 802.3z
LAN 10 / 100 / 1000 Base-TX, 1000 Base-SX, 1000 Base-LX
Cable length (segment) Ethernet: max. 100 m, Fibre: 550 m (multimode), 10,000 m (single mode)
Connection technology (data) 1 × RJ45, 1 × SC, 6-pin connector
Status Indication P1, P2, P-Fail, Fibre: Link/Activity, Etnernet: 1000 M, Link/ACtivity
Dimensions
Wavelength 850nm –
Tx Power -4/-9.5 dBm –
Rx sensitivity -18 dBm –
Parameters 50 / 125 µm, 62.5 / 125 µm
Wavelength – 1310 nm
Tx Power – -3/-9.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity – -20 dBm
Parameters 9 / 125 µm
DIP switch Port Alarm, LFP
General
PIN assignment Power comsumption 5.18 W 5.30 W
61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8
EN 61000-6-2, IEC60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-32, IEC 60068-2-6
Safety
Rated over load protection 0.9 A @ DC 12 V, resettable
Mechanics
Monitoring
monitoring
Note
4.19
LÜTZE - Ethernet cables • Overview
Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET / ETHERCAT Cat5

® ®
LÜTZE Type SUPERFLEX ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SUPERFLEX
Category Cat5 Cat5 Cat5 Cat5
Application
according to Profinet Typ C Profinet Typ B Profinet Typ A
Dimensions 2x2xAWG22/7 2x2xAWG22/7 2x2xAWG22/1 2x2xAWG22/19
Part-No. 104303 04307 104301 104302
Screen • • • •
Jacket PUR PVC PVC PUR
UL CMX CMG CMG CMX
Temperature moved fixed fixed moved
range -25°C/+70°C -30°C/+80°C -30°C/+80°C -25°C/+70°C
Cat5e Industrial Ethernet / Ethernet IP Cat6 Cat7

® ®
LÜTZE Type ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SUPERFLEX ELECTRONIC SUPERFLEX ELECTRONIC
Category Cat5e Cat5e Cat5e Cat6a Cat6 Cat7
Application
according to prEN 50173-3 prEN 50173-3 prEN 50173-3 prEN 50173-3
Dimensions 4x2xAWG 26/7 4x2xAWG 24/7 4x2xAWG 24/19 4x2xAWG 26/7 4x2xAWG26/19 4x2xAWG26/7
Part-No. 104335 104336 104337 104338 104347 104331
Screen • • • • • •
Jacket PVC PVC PUR PVC PUR PVC
UL CMG CMG AWM CMG CMX CMG
Temperature fixed fixed moved fixed moved fixed
range -30°C/+80°C -30°C/+80°C -25°C/+70°C -30°C/+80°C -25°C/+70°C -30°C - +80°C
4.20
LÜTZE - Ethernet Cables • Transmission Parameters
4.21
Bus cables
LÜTZE ELECTRONIC ETHERNET BUS (C) PUR

LÜTZE ELECTRONIC ETHERNET BUS (C) PVC
Application Part-No. Number of strands/cross-section/ Jacket Outer-∅ Weight Cu-Index

• For the cabling of industrial field bus systems with the globally strand colours approx. kg/100 m kg/100 m
accepted TCP/IP protocol
• Applicable in automation technology, transport and conveyor mm
technology, machine tool manufacture ELECTRONIC Fast Ethernet / ProfiNet
• For hard wiring or moving use without compulsory guide in the 104247 (2×2×0.22/AWG24/7) Cat5 UR PUR 6.1 6.5 2.5
automation technology, transport and conveyor technology, Star quad violet
machine tool manufacture Transmission pair white/brown; green/
Properties yellow
• High active and passive interference resistance 104243 (2×2×0.22/AWG24/7) Cat5 PUR 6.1 6.5 2.5
• Free from paint wetting disruptive substances (LABS-free), Star quad violet
RoHS-compliant
Transmission pair white/brown; green/
Technical data yellow
Impedance 100 Ω ± 10 % (1–100 MHz) 104301 (2×2×0.64/AWG22/1)StC Cat5 UL PVC 6.5 6.5 3.7
Loop resistance Star quad, FC, ProfiNet type A green
<110 Ω/km Transmission pair white/blue, yellow/
Wire AWG 22/1= 0.342
orange
Braid AWG 24/7= 0.222 <165 Ω/km
104307 (2×2×0.34/AWG22/7)StC Cat5 UL PVC 6.5 6.5 3.1
Braid AWG 26/7=0.142 <273 Ω/km Star quad, FC, ProfiNet type B green
Operating capacitance <50 pF/m Transmission pair white/blue, yellow/
Rated voltage 250 V orange
Test voltage 1500 V 104327 (4x2xAWG26/7 StC) Cat5e UL PUR 6.3 5.0 3.0
whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
Temperature range
whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
moving -5 °C to +70 °C
104335 (4x2xAWG26/7 StC) Cat5e UL PVC 6.3 5.4 3.0
run -30 °C to +80 °C whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
Minimum bending radius whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
moving D × 12 104336 (4x2xAWG24/7 StC) Cat5e UL PVC 7.6 6.7 5.5
fixed D×6 whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
Fire performance Flame-retardant according to whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
VDE 0482 part 265-2; IEC 60332-1; 104338 (4x(2xAWG26/7)St)C Cat6 UL PVC 6.4 5.3 3.3
UL 1581 section VW-1 Flame-Test; whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
CSA FT 1
whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
Halogen-free according to DIN EN 50264-1;
EN 50267-2-1 and EN 60684-2 104339 (4x(2xAWG26/7)St)C Cat7 UL PUR 7.0 6.1 3.3
whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
Approvals UL listed CMG or.
CMX 75 °C (see article description whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
UL) For Siemens Drive-Cliq® system
UL recognized 80 °C 30 V (see 104313 (2×2×AWG26) PVC 6.8 7.3 3.4
article description UR) green/yellow, blue/red green
104311 (2×2×AWG26+2×AWG22) PUR 6.8 7.3 3.4
Design AWG26: green/yellow, blue/pink green
• Bare copper wire AWG22: red, black
• Braid according to AWG
• Conductor insulation special polyolefin
• ST static shield
• Galvanised copper wire braid, optical coverage ≥ 85 %
• Jacket special-PUR, matt, adhesion-free surface or PVC
• Jacket colour violet RAL 4001; green RAL 6018
CE These products are in conformity with the EU Low Voltage Direc-

tive 2006/95/EC
4.22
Bus conductors ·
LÜTZE SUPERFLEX® ETHERNET BUS (C) PUR
Application Part-No. Number of strands/cross-section/ Jacket Outer-∅ Weight Cu-Index

• For the cabling of industrial field bus systems with the globally strand colours approx. kg/100 m kg/100 m
accepted TCP/IP protocol
• Applicable in automation technology, transport and conveyor mm
technology, machine tool manufacture SUPERFLEX Fast Ethernet / ProfiNet
• For continuous flexible application e.g. in c-tracks or free move- 104304 (2×2×AWG23/19)StC Cat5 UR PUR 6.6 7.5 3.7
ment Star quad; ProfiNet green
Properties Transmission pair white/blue; yellow/
• High active and passive interference resistance orange
• Free from paint wetting disruptive substances (LABS-free), 104246 (4×2×AWG24/19) Cat5 UR PUR 9.6 12.5 5.7
RoHS-compliant white/brown, green/yellow, grey/pink, violet
Technical data blue/red
Impedance 100 Ω ± 10 % (1–100 MHz) 104245 (2×2×AWG24/19) Cat5 UR PUR 6.1 6.5 3.7
Loop resistance Star quad violet
<130 Ω/km Transmission pair white/brown; green/
Braid AWG 23/19= 0.302 yellow
Braid AWG 24/19= 0.242 <155 Ω/km 104303 (2×2×AWG22/7)StC Cat5 UL PUR 6.5 6.1 3.1
Braid AWG 26/19= 0.14 2 <280 Ω/km Star quad; ProfiNet green
<110 Ω/km Transmission pair white/blue; yellow/
Braid AWG 22/7= 0.342
orange
Operating capacitance <50 pF/m
104326 (4×2×AWG26/19) Cat5e PUR 6.3 5.2 3.0
Rated voltage 250 V whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
Test voltage 1500 V whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
Temperature range 104337 (4×2×AWG24/19) Cat5e UR PUR 7.8 6.8 5.5
moving -25 °C to +70 °C whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
fixed -40 °C to +80 °C whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
Minimum bending radius 104347 (4×2×AWG26/19) Cat6 PUR 7.9 6.3 4.2
moving D × 12 whiteblue/blue, whiteorange/orange, green
fixed D×6 whitegreen/green, whitebrown/brown
Fire performance Flame-retardant according to For Siemens Drive-Cliq® system
VDE 0482 part 265-2; IEC 60332-1; 104310 (2×2×AWG26+2×AWG22) PUR 6.8 7.3 3.4
UL 1581 section VW-1 Flame-Test; pink/blue, yellow/green green
CSA FT 1 red, black
Halogen-free according to DIN EN 50264-1;
EN 50267-2-1 and EN 60684-2
Approvals UL listed PLTC (see article descrip-
tion UL)
UL recognized 80 °C 30 V (see
article description UR)
Note Note on laying PVC C-track
cables in chapter 2 of the cata-
logue TK1.
Bus cables for robot applications
see chapter on robot cables.
Design
• Bare copper wire
• Braid according to AWG
• Conductor insulation special polyolefin
• ST static shield
• Halogen-free inside jacket
• Galvanised copper wire braid, optical coverage ≥ 85 %
• Jacket special-PUR, matt, adhesion-free surface
• Jacket colour violet RAL 4001; green RAL 6018; black RAL 9005
CE These products are in conformity with the EU Low Voltage Direc-

tive 2006/95/EC
4.23
·
Patch cable FOC GOF

Ready-made with SCRJ and SC-Duplex connector, IP 20
Multimode optical fibre 50/125 µm

Cable length
Description 1.0 m 772141.0100 LWL 2×SCRJ/GOF 50/125µm 1,0m 1
2.0 m 772141.0200 LWL 2×SCRJ/GOF 50/125µm 2,0m 1
5.0 m 772141.0500 LWL 2×SCRJ/GOF 50/125µm 5,0m 1
Technical data 772141.0100 772141.0200 772141.0500

Fibre type Tight buffered fibre
Fibre dimensions 50 / 125 µm
Bandwidth-distance product ≥ 600 MHz x km with 850Nm, ≥ 1200 MHz x km with 1300nm
Number of terminations 2
Cable length 1.0 2.0 5.0
Loss 2.5 dB/km with 850 nm, junction loss: ≤0.5 dB
Numerical aperture 0.2
Dimensions Contact type SCRJ to EN 50377-6-1, SC-Duplex to IEC 61754-4
General
Form Male / male
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Insulation resistance –
Contact resistance –
Class of flammability according to
V0
UL 94
Housing material PBT
Gasket –
Contact material –
Field installation –
Bending radius ≥ 65 mm
Cable construction Cladding material single-fibre FRNC red, green
Cable jacket LSZH orange
Cable diameter Twin cable (2.8 × 5.7 mm)
Ferrule diameter 2.5 mm
Mechanical service life ≥ 1000 insertion cycles
Dimensions (w × h × d) 16.5 × 61.5 × 11 mm / 21.6 × 52 × 8.4 mm
Weight (kg/piece) –
Approvals –
Standards SCRJ to EN 50377-6-1, SC-Duplex to IEC 61754-4
Pin layout
4.24
·
Patch cable FOC POF IP67

Ready-made V6 enclosure with SCRJ connector
Polymer fibre 980/1000 µm
Description 772125.xxxx LWL 2×SCRJ/V6 POF 980/1000µm 1
Technical data 772125.xxxx

Fibre type PMMA
Bandwidth-distance product ≥10 MHz x 100 m with 650 nm
Cable length Variable from 1.0 - 100 m
Loss 230 dB/km with 660 nm, junction loss: ≤1.7 dB with 660 nm
Contact type SCRJ to EN 50377-6-1
General
Dimensions Form V6 to ISO/IEC 61076-3-106
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pin layout Class of flammability according to
–
UL 94
Housing material PBT/PA
Gasket FPM
Cable construction Cladding material PA fibre black and orange
Cable jacket PUR red
Cable diameter 8.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
Approvals –
Standards SCRJ to EN 50377-6-1
SC-Duplex to IEC 61754-4
4.25
·
Patch cable FOC GOF IP67

Ready-made V6 enclosure with SCRJ connector
Multimode optical fibre 50/125 µm
Description 772126.xxxx LWL 2×SCRJ/V6 GOF 50/125µm 1
Technical data 772126.xxxx

Fibre type Tight buffered fibre
Bandwidth-distance product ≥600 MHz x km with 850Nm, ≥1200 MHz x km with 1300nm
Cable length Variable from 1.0 - 100 m
Loss 2.5 dB/km with 850 nm, junction loss: ≤0.5 dB
General
Dimensions Form V6 to ISO/IEC 61076-3-106
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pin layout Class of flammability according to
–
UL 94
Housing material PA
Gasket FPM
Cable construction Cladding material single-fibre FRNC red, green
Cable jacket PUR orange
Cable diameter 8.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
Approvals –
SC-Duplex to IEC 61754-4
4.26
·
Patch cable FOC POF IP67

Ready-made V14 enclosure, push-pull with SCRJ connector
Polymer fibre 980/1000 µm

Suitable for fieldbus systems
Description Profinet 1.0 m 772136.0100 LWL 2×SCRJ/V14 POF 980/1000µm 1
1,0m
Profinet 2.0 m 772136.0200 LWL 2×SCRJ/V14 POF 980/1000µm 1
2,0m
Profinet 5.0 m 772136.0500 LWL 2×SCRJ/V14 POF 980/1000µm 1
5,0m
Technical data 772136.0100 772136.0200 772136.0500

Fibre type PMMA
Bandwidth-distance product ≥10 MHz x 100 m with 650 nm
Cable length 1.0 2.0 5.0
Dimensions
Loss 2.5 dB/km with 850 nm, junction loss: ≤1.7 dB with 660 nm
General
Form V14 to IEC 61918, IEC 61784-5-3
–
50178)
Test voltage –
–
Pin layout UL 94
Housing material PA-GF
Gasket NBR
Field installation Push-pull
Cable construction Cladding material PA fibre black and orange
Cable jacket LSFH green RAL 6018
Cable diameter 7.5 mm
Weight (kg/piece) 0.172 0.184 0.222
Approvals –
4.27
LÜTZE - Ethernet Cables - Allocation of Connectors
Category Conductor Fexibility Jacket Art.-Nr. Ø
Type RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 M12
IP 20 20 20 20 67
Pole 8 8 8 8 4
Descr. male male male Din-rail male
AWG TIA TIA module
26 568B 568A female
TIA
568B
Cat 6a 6a 6a 6 5e
Part-No. 490138 490128 490129 772104 490074
Cables
2 pair Cat5 AWG 22/7 drag chain PUR 104303 6,5 • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL
2 pair Cat5 AWG 22/7 flexible PVC 104307 6,5 • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL
2 pair Cat5 AWG 22/1 fixed PVC 104301 6,5 • PN,EC,SC • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL • PN,EC,SC,PL
2 pair Cat5 AWG 22/19 drag chain PUR 104302 6,6 • • • EC,EI
Cables
4 pair Cat5e AWG 24/19 drag chain PUR 104337 7,8 • EI • EI • EI
4 pair Cat5e AWG 26/7 flexible PVC 104335 6,3 • EI • EI
4 pair Cat5e AWG 24/7 flexible PVC 104336 7,3 • EI • EI • EI • EI • EI
4 pair Cat6a AWG 26/7 flexible PVC 104338 6,4 • EI
4 pair Cat7 1) AWG 26/7 flexible PVC 104331 6,4 • EI
4 pair Cat61) AWG 26/19 drag chain PUR 104347 7,9 • EI
PN PROFINET 2 pair AWG 22

PL Powerlink 2 pair AWG 22
EC Ethercat 2 pair AWG 22 - 26
SC Sercos 2 pair AWG 22
EI Ethernet/IP 2 pair;4pair AWG 22 - 26
4.28
·
Industrial connector RJ45

IDC quick-connect technology, no tools required
Category 5e / 6A

Description Profinet, SERCOS 772101 RJ45-M 4pol. Cat.5e Profinet 1
3, Ethercat 4-pin
Ethernet/IP, Pow- 772100 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.5e 1
erlink, VARAN 8-
pin
Ethernet/IP, Pow- 772102 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.6A 1
erlink, VARAN 8-
pin
Technical data 772101 772100 772102

Nominal voltage 30 V 50 V
Nominal voltage range –
Rated current Max. 1.75 A per contact
Dimensions Number of terminations 4 8
Cable length (m) –
Transmission frequency 100 MHz 250 MHz, 10 Gigabit/s
Category 5e (TIA 5688:2001) 6A EIA/TIA 568B.2-10
Contact type IDC
Shielding yes
General
Form RJ45
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 1 2
Contact resistance ≤50 mΩ
V0 V2
UL 94
Housing material PA grey PA black
Cover –
Connection assignment Contact material CuSn, gold-plated
Installation depth –
Cable construction –
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter 4.5 – 8 mm
Cross section AWG 26-22 AWG 26-24
Mechanical service life ≥ 1000 insertion cycles ≥ 750 insertion cycles
Approvals –
Standards Profinet –
4.29
·

Version V6; category 5e
IDC quick-connect technology

Suitable for Ethernet applications
Description Cat.5e 772120 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.5e V6 1
Cat.6 772121 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.6 V6 1
Technical data 772120 772121

Nominal voltage 30 V
Rated current Max. 1.75 A per contact Max. 1.0 A per contact
Transmission frequency 100 MHz 250 MHz
Category 5e (TIA 5688:2001) 6
Contact type IDC
Dimensions Shielding yes
General
Form V6 to ISO/IEC 61076-3-106
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 2
Connection assignment Contact resistance ≤50 mΩ
V0 V2
UL 94
Housing material PA black
Gasket NBR / FPM
Contact material CuSn, gold-plated
Field installation No tools required Parallel crimp tool required
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter 5 – 8 mm
Cross section AWG 16-22 AWG 24-20
Approvals –
Standards –
Parallel crimp tool 772129 RJ45-LC 1
Cable gland 772122 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.5e 1
V6
Cable gland 772123 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.6 V6 1
Cable gland 772124 PM-RJ45 8F/F Cat.5e V6 1
4.30
·
Module holder, RJ45, female / IDC

For TS35 DIN rail
Category 6

Description 8-pin 772104 MDT-RJ45 F Cat.6 1
Technical data 772104

Transmission frequency 250 MHz
Category 6
Contact type IDC
Shielding yes
Dimensions General
Form RJ45
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 1
V0
UL 94
Connection assignment Protection class IP 20
Housing material PC-GF grey
Cable jacket –
Cross section AWG 24-22
Approvals –
Standards –
Patch cable RJ45 Cat.5e 192000.xxxx xxxx cable length from 0.5 1
- 30 m
Patch cable RJ45 Cat.6e 192100.xxxx xxxx cable length from 0.5 1
- 30 m
4.31
·
Module holder FOC female/female

For TS35 DIN rail
SCRJ , duplex, GOF, POF
Description 772106 MDT-LWL-SCRJ 1

Rated current –
Number of terminations –
Category –
Shielding –
Dimensions General
Form Module holder FOC female/female
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 1
V0
UL 94
Housing material PC-GF grey
Gasket –
Cable jacket –
Cross section 2.5 mm
Approvals –
Standards –
Connection assignment
4.32
Actuator sensor interface
terface ·
RJ45 panel connector for front installation 22.5 mm

female/female 1:1
Category 5e/6

Category
Cat.5e 492075 RJ45 F/F 8/8 Cat.5e 1
Cat.6 491075 RJ45 F/F 8/8 Cat.6 1

Nominal voltage AC 24 V
Nominal voltage range AC 50 V AC 150 V
Rated current 1.5 A
Rate of transmission 100 MHz 250 MHz
Category 5e 6
Contact type 1:1
Dimensions Shielding shield connected through 360° shielding
Coding –
General
Form RJ45
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 3
Circuit diagram Contact resistance ≤30 mΩ
492075 V0
UL 94
Protection class IP 65 and NEMA UL Type 12 in closed and IP 20 in inserted condition
Housing material PA-GF25; PBT Gf20; cover TPU
Cover TPU
Field installation Front plate cutout D=22.5mm
491075 Installation depth approx. 70 mm
Cable construction 8 (4-pair)
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter –
Bending radius –
Mounting diagram Storage temperature range -25 °C – 80 °C
Mechanical service life <750 insertion cycles
Dimension (?×D) 29.5 × 29 mm
Approvals cULus
Standards –
4.33
Actuator sensor interface
nterface ·
Control cabinet bushing M12 - RJ45

female/female 1:1
Category 5e
4 pole 90° 490105 M12-R45 F/F 90° 4/4 Cat.5e PROFINET 1

4 pole 180° 490106 M12-R45 F/F 180° 4/4 Cat.5e PROFI- 1
NET
8 pole 90° 490107 M12-R45 F/F 90° 8/8 Cat.5e 1
8 pole 180° 490108 M12-R45 F/F 180° 8/8 Cat.5e 1
Technical data 490105 490106 490107 490108

Nominal voltage range 50 V
Rated current max. 1 A per contact
Number of terminations 4 8
Rate of transmission 100 Mbit/s 1 Gbit/s
Category 5e 6
Contact type 1:1
Shielding 360° shielding
Coding D A
General
Form RJ45 / M12 x 1
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 3
Dimensions Class of flammability according to
V0
UL 94
Protection class IP 67 in screwed condition
Housing material PA
Cover –
Contact material Phosphor bronze, gold-plated
Installation depth approx. 70 mm
Circuit diagram Cable construction –
490105, 490106 Cable jacket –
Cable diameter –
Bending radius –
Dimension (?×D) 29.5 × 29 mm
490107, 490108 Approvals –
Standards PROFINET –
Mounting diagram
4.34
·
Cable gland, RJ45, female / IDC

Version V6
Category 5e / 6, IDC, no tools required

Description Cat.5e 772122 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.5e V6 1
Cat.6 772123 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.6 V6 1

Category 5e (TIA 568B:2001) 6
Contact type IDC
Shielding yes
General
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 1
V0
UL 94
Gasket NBR
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter Max. 9.5 mm
Dimensions Approvals –
Standards –
Industrial connector RJ45 772120 RJ45-M 8-pin Cat.5e V6 1
Industrial connector RJ45 772121 RJ45-M 8-pin Cat.6 V6 1
Mounting diagram
4.35
·
Cable gland RJ45 female / female

Version V6
Category 5e

Description Cat.5e 772124 PM-RJ45 8F/F Cat.5e V6 1

Transmission frequency 100 MHz
Category 5e (TIA 568B:2001
Contact type –
Shielding yes
General
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 1
V0
UL 94
Gasket NBR
Cable jacket –
Cross section –
Approvals –
Mounting diagram
4.36
·
Cable gland FOC female / female

Version V6
SCRJ, duplex, GOF, POF
Description 772127 PM-LWL F/F SCRJ V6 1

Rated current –
Category –
Shielding –
General
–
50178)
Test voltage –
V0
UL 94
Gasket NBR
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter –
Cross section –
Approvals –
Mounting diagram
4.37
·

Version V14, push-pull
Category 5e

Description Profinet, Sercos 3, 772131 RJ45-M 4pol. Cat.5e V14 Profinet 1
Ethercat 4-pin
Ethernet applica- 772130 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.5e V14 1
tions, 8-pin
Ethernet applica- 772132 RJ45-M 8pol. Cat.6 V14 1
tions, 8-pin
Technical data 772131 772130 772132

Dimensions
Contact type IDC
Shielding yes
General
Form V14 to IEC 61918; IEC 61784-5-3
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 2
Connection assignment Class of flammability according to
V0
UL 94
Gasket NBR / FPM
Field installation Parallel crimp tool requi-
No tools required
red
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter 5 – 8 mm
Approvals –
Standards –
Parallel crimp tool 772129 RJ45-LC 1
V14 Profinet
V14
Cable gland 772135 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.6 1
V14
4.38
·
Cable gland, RJ45, female / IDC

Category 5e

Description Profinet, SERCOS 772134 PM-RJ45 4F/IDC Cat.5e V14 Profinet 1
3, Ethercat 4-pin
Ethernet applica- 772133 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.5e V14 1
tions, 8-pin
Ethernet applica- 772135 PM-RJ45 8F/IDC Cat.6 V14 1
tions, 8-pin
Technical data 772134 772133 772135

Contact type IDC
Shielding yes
General
Form V14 to IEC 61918, IEC 61784-5-3
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 2
V0
UL 94
Housing material PA-GF black
Gasket NBR
Cable jacket –
Dimensions
Approvals –
Standards Profinet –
Profinet
Mounting diagram Industrial connector RJ45 772132 RJ45-M 8-pin Cat.6 V14 1
4.39
·
Cable gland FOC female / female

SCRJ, duplex, POF
Description 772137 PM-RJ45 LWL SCRJ V14 1

Rated current –
Category –
Shielding –
General
Form V14 to IEC 61918; IEC 61784-5-3
–
50178)
Test voltage –
Pollution degree 2
V0
UL 94
Housing material PA-GF black
Gasket NBR
Dimensions Contact material –
Cable jacket –
Cable diameter –
Cross section –
Mounting diagram Operation temperature range -20 °C – 70 °C
Approvals –
Standards –
Patch cable 772136.xxxx FOC POF SCRJ V14 IP67 1
0.5 - 100 m
4.40
Notes
4.41
LÜTZE - Ethernet Connectivity • Glossary
AC Access Client Radio-supported communication unit that has to log an assigned MAC address. In comparison to --> RARP rootbar.
onto the Access Point (--> AP). Only after successful authentication is it Bridge --> Switch
possible for the Access Client to transmit data to the network, or to receive Broadcast data packet that is address to everyone in a network. Hubs and
data from the network. (--> Wireless LAN) switches are transparent for broadcasts. Only routers limit a broadcast, if
Access Protocol Access procedure. Governs access to the medium. Ethernet: necessary. --> Multicast and Unicast.
CSMA/CD; Token Ring: Token FDDI: Append Token; WLAN: CSMA/CA BT Bit Time, duration of a bit.
Access procedure --> Access Protocol. CCITT Comité Consultatif International Téléphonique et Télégraphique.
ACK Acknowledge Designates a positive confirmation of receipt. ACK is Now --> ITU-T
part of the communication protocol and is responsible for the confirmation CC-Link - Control and Communication Link, Industrial automation network
of receipt of the transmission. based on Ethernet
ACR attenuation to crosstalk ratio; corresponds to a signal-to-disturbance CCK Complementary Code Keying. CCK is used in the 11 Mbit/s-version
signal distance for interference from other pairs. Is determined by simple of the 802.11 LAN (80211b), and can pack a number of bits in a single
subtraction of the dB values symbol. This allow a higher transmission rate.
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line. Long-distance access CD Collision Detect.
AES Advanced Encryption Standard. Encryption standard with 128-, 192- CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. PPP authentication
and 256-bit encryption. This symmetrical encryption is intended to replace method. Passwords are transmitted with a random number. Comparison -> PAP
the previous DES standard. Cheapernet coax cable according to Ethernet partial standard 10BASE2.
Aging Process (algorithm) for updating data, especially address memory. Synonyms: ThinWire, RG58.
After a time elapses, an address is marked as "old" and deleted in the CoS Class of Service. A network with class of service makes it possible to
next pass, if it is not detected at a port before that. to transfer data with minimal delay in an environment in which a network is
AP Access Point. In wireless networks the Access Point is the --> bridge to shared by many users, CoS classifies the data data traffic into categories
the wire-bound networks. It can be connected directly to Ethernet, Token such a high, medium and low (gold, silver and bronze)
Ring or ATM. The access point is connected with all of the network CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check. Error check mechanism in which the
accounts ("access clients"), and performs central functions such as roam- recipient performs a polynomial calculation. The result is compared with a
ing or security. (--> Wireless LAN) value saved in the frame that is determined by the transmitter using the
API Application Programming Interface same procedure. See also FCS.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol requests the associated MAC address CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect. Access proce-
via the IP address. --> RARP dure for Ethernet. A station that wants to transmit listens whether the net-
ARS Automatic Rate Selection. Independent selection of the transmission work is free (carrier sense). After that it begins to transmit, and at the same
speed by the access point (--> AP) depending on the connection quality time check whether other stations have also begun to transmit (multiple
(distance). access), which could lead to collisions (collision detection). The collision is
ASN 1 Abstract Syntax Notation One. Programming language of the --> MIB. detected by the station and they cancel the transmission. They start a new
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. Based on cells of 53 bytes. Suitable transmission attempt after a time determined by a random generator.
for telephone, video and other data transmission. Is primarily used in WAN Cut-Through Switching method in which a packet is forwarded as soon
applications. as the target address is recognised. This means that the latency is short,
AUI Attachment Unit Interface. Interface for physical isolation of trans- but faulty packets are still forwarded. This is also known as "on-the-fly
ceivers from Ethernet controllers (cable up to a max. of 50 m) packet switching". Also see Store & Forward.
Autocrossing A function that allow automatic crossing of the transmission DA See Destination address.
and reception conductors at twisted pair interfaces. Switches that support Attenuation Ratio of power fed to power received on a transmission line, both
this function can be connected to each other via a 1:1 wired cable instead for copper cables and for fibre-optic cables. Specified in dB per unit of length
of a crossover cable. DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keying. DBPSK is a modulation
Autonegotiation Detects on the port the transmission parameters of the process for systems with 1 Mbit/s that is used with the --> DSSS trans-
connected device, such as speed, duplex mode and flow control, and mission process according to the 802.11 standard.
automatically adjusts itself to the optimal values. DCE Data Communication Equipment, e.g. printers, modems. --> DTE
Autopolarity A function of devices with a 10 BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX DES Data Encryption Standard. Systematic encryption algorithm. The
interface for automatic correction of wiring errors in twisted pair cables, same secret key is used for encryption and decryption; i.e. all instances
which leads to a polarity reversal of the data signals. that have to be able to encrypt and decrypt have to know the key. DES
Autosensing A function that allows a device to automatically detect the encodes with a 56-bit key. 3DES increases the security of the normal DES
data rate (10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, 1 Gbit/s), and to transmit and receive method by encrypting the data with a key that is three times longer (168 bits).
using this data rate. Destination Address Destination address in Ethernet, IP, etc. "Address
Backpressure Simulates a collision in HDX mode by generating a jam on the data packet"
signal. --> Flow-Control DeviceNet DeviceNet is a low cost industrial network that uses CAN tech-
Bandwidth Amount of data that can be transferred in one second. For a nology. It links industrial components such as limit switches, valves, motor
single connection this is the same as the speed. switches and drives with a PLC or a PC.
Bandwidth-length product Used to estimate what distance a multimode DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. On request informs a device
fibre supports with a certain data rate (speed). The gross rate must be as to its IP address, which is fixed via the associated MAC address, or is
used here. assigned dynamically.
BFOC Bayonet Fiber Optical Connector. Also known as an ST Connector Dispersion - Signal spreading through propagation time differences,
(AT&T brand). Fibre-optic connector with bayonet connector. The only especially in optical fibres: Mode dispersion in multimode, chromatic dis-
standardised connector for 10 Mbit/s Ethernet. Available for multimode and persion in single mode)
single mode glass fibres and also for --> POF. DNS Domain Name System. Resets host name in IP addresses per DNS
BGNW The BGNW (Benutzergruppe Netzwerke / Network User Group) is server or statically per “hosts” file.
a manufacturer-neutral, independent interest group for leading internation- Domain Broadcast domain: Network area that is only limited by routers,
al users and manufacturers of Network systems. The goal of the associa- i.e. within which a broadcast can propagate freely. --> Collisions domain:
tion is to promote its participants and to facilitate the exchange of informa- Network area that is delimited by switches or routers, and in which colli-
tion among them, as well as developing recommendations for the plan- sions can propagate freely.
ning, installation, and operation of networks. DQPSK Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying. DQPSK is a modula-
BGP Border Gateway Protocol. Routing protocol in the --> WAN. tion process for systems with 1 Mbit/s or 2 Mbit/s, which is used with the
BLP --> Bandwidth Length Product DSSS transmission process, standard 802.11.
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman. Connector for connection of 10 Base2 DSC Duplex straight connector. See also SC.
coax cables to a --> MAU. DSL Digital Subscriber Line. Technology to operate the Internet with 1.5
BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. Supplies the statically assigned IP address for MBit/s over copper cables.
4.42
DSSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum. DSSS is a transmission Gbps Gigabits per second, Gbit/s.
method according to standard 802.11. By means of encoding, this method GMRP --> GARP Multicast Registration Protocol.
converts the narrowband signal into a broadband signal. In this way it is GVRP --> GARP VLAN Registration Protocol.
possible to use the entire frequency band, thus achieving a higher data Half Duplex --> HDX
transmission rate and lower susceptibility to interference. Halogen-free: In the event of a fire, halogen-free cables do not form any
DTE Data Terminal Equipment, e.g. computers. See also difference from acidic fumes, which are very dangerous for both people and electronic
DCE Pin assignment. devices
Dual Homing Network technology in which a device is linked to a net- HASH Checksum that ensures the integrity of information.
work via two independent points of attachment. One point of attachment is HCS® Hard Polymer Clad Silica. Plastic fibre with a core of fuse quartz.
the primary connection, while the other is standby connection that is acti- --> PCF --> POF.
vated if the primary connection fails. HDX Half Duplex. Transmission mode of a component: Either transmitting
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol: Internetwork gateway or receiving is possible. In Ethernet, the access procedure CSMA/CD is
protocol, largely based on RIP. DVMRP uses IGMP to exchange routing required for this. --> FDX.
datagrams with its neighbours. HiRRP Protocol for controlling redundant routers. If one of the two routers
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex. fails, then within 800 ms the remaining router completely assumes the
Dynamic DNS: Assigns the same name when there is a changing IP tasks of the other one.
address. Hops Maximum number of router steps possible for a data packet. See
EMC - electromagnetic compatibility also TTL.
Electromagnetic compatibility. Interference immunity and emissions behav- HSRP Hot Standby Routing Protocol. Protocol for controlling redundant
iour with regard to electromagnetic interference, Class A/B. routers. See also VRRP.
EtherCat: Industrial Ethernet system from the company Beckhoff HTML Hypertext Markup Language.
Ethernet Data network, standardised in IEEE 802.3 since 1983. Based HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol. Protocol used by web browsers and
on the access procedure --> CSMA/C. Variable packet length from 64 web servers for transmitting data, such as text and images.
bytes to 1518 bytes (1522 with TAG field). Speeds/bandwidth: 10 Mbit/s, HTTPS --> HTTP Secure. HTTP communication encrypted in packets.
100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet), 1000 Mbit/s (Gigabit Ethernet) and 10000 Hub Component on Layer 1 of the ISO/OSI Reference Model.
Mbit/s (10-gigabit Ethernet). Regenerates the amplitude and the signal shape of the incoming signal
EtherNet/IP is a protocol stack for Ethernet that has been developed for and forwards it to all of the other ports. Synonyms: Star coupler, con-
industrial applications. EtherNet/IP is based on the standard TCP/IP proto- centrator.
col, and uses a common application layer with DeviceNet. It thus makes it IAONA (Industrial Automation Open Networking Alliance Europe e.V)
easier to exchange information between device level networks and infor- Europe was founded in 1999 at the SPS/IPC/Drives trade fair Nuremberg.
mation systems at the plant level. IAONA is an association that now includes more than 130 leading interna-
Industrial Ethernet system of the --> ODVA tional manufacturers and users of automation systems. The association's
ETHERNET Packet Designation for a data packet. Besides the actual goal is to establish Ethernet on the international level as the standard
user data, it also contains the destination and source address fields (DA application in all industrial environments. The purpose of this is to bring
and SA), the TAG field (4 bytes, optional) and the Length/Type field. about uniform, interface-free communication through all levels of a compa-
FCS Frame Check Sequence. Checksum at the end of an Ethernet pack- ny. This relates to all areas of factory, process and building automation.
et; is calculated and entered by the sender. The recipient calculates the For further information: http://www.iaona-eu.com/
checksum based on the received packet and compares it with the entered ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. Best-known command: Ping.
value. See also CRC. ID Identifier.
FDB Forwarding Data Base. Address table of a switch that it uses to IDA Interface for Distributed Automation. Open interface based on the
decide what port a packet has to be sent to. In the address table, a MAC TCP/IP stack, for automation applications.
address is assigned to the port that is used to reach the corresponding IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. international standardisa-
device. The table is updated regularly (--> Aging). tion body
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface. Data network, standardised in ISO IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Standardisation
9314, ANSI X3T9.5 and X3T1 2. body for LANs with the important standards 802.3 for Ethernet, 802.1 for
FDX Full Duplex. Transmission mode of a component: simultaneous trans- switches.
mitting and receiving is possible. No access procedure necessary. See IETF Internet Engineering Task Force.
also HDX. IFG Inter Frame Gap. Minimum gap between two packets. Synonym: Inter
FEXT Far End Crosstalk: Crosstalk at the far end in symmetrical copper Packet Gap (IPG).
cables. IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol. Layer 3 protocol for multicast
Flame-retardant - Characteristic of a cable not to spread a flame (wicking transport, see also GMRP.
effect) and/or to extinguish it. IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping. A func-
Flow-Control Strategy in case of overload at the output port and the start tion in which the switches examine IGMP packets and assign the mem-
of a memory overflow: discarding of packets at the input port or signalling bership of a node to a multicast group to the respective port. In this man-
to connected devices that they should stop transmitting by simulating a ner it possible to send multicasts specifically to those segments that con-
collision in HDX mode or by transmitting special "Pause" packets in FDX tain nodes of a group.
mode. IGP Interior Gateway Protocol.
F/O Fiber optics. IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol. Internet Protocol see IP.
Frame Relay Modified version of X.25 packet switching in a WAN. IP Internet Protocol. Transmission protocol on Layer 3, widely used (> 80%).
FTP - Foiled Twisted Pair, foil-shielded symmetrical data cable IPv4: Vers. 4=4-byte addresses; IPv6: Vers. 6 =16-byte addresses, IPnG=IPv6
FTP 1. File Transfer Protocol. Protocol on Layer 5, uses TCP for transfer, IP address Logical address, assigned by the network operator. Address
therefore used in WANs. 2. Foiled Twisted Pair. format (v4): 4 bytes in decimal code, separated by dots, e.g. 192.178.2.1.
FTTD Fiber To The Desk Office wiring with fibre-optic cables as far as the See also net mask.
end node IPnG IP next generation. Transmission protocol, see IP.
Full Duplex --> FDX IPsec IP Security. Standard that makes it possible to ensure the authentic-
GARE Generic Attribute Registration Protocol. Protocol family for ity of the sender, confidentiality and the integrity of data in IP datagrams by
exchanging parameters between switches on Layer 2, at present there means of encryption. With IPSec a --> VPN can be set up on Layer 3. For
exist --> GMRP and --> GVRP. encryption IPsec uses --> 3DES, for example.
Gateway Component above Layer 2 of the ISO/OSI Reference Model. IPv4 IP Version 4. Transmission protocol, see IP.
On Layer 3 usually called a router. Converts protocols of these layers into IPv6 IP Version 6. Transmission protocol, see IP.
each other. IPX Internet Packet Exchange. Protocol stack from Novell, comparable to
GBIC Gigabit interface converter. See under SFP. TCP/IP.
4.43
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. WAN transmission protocol. Binary depiction
ISO International Organization for Standardization. Global standardisation IP address 10010101.11011010.00010011.01011010
body. Net mask 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
ISO/OSI --> OSI reference model.. --> Subnetwork
ISP Internet Service Provider. 10010101.11011010.00010011.00000000
Jabber In Ethernet, a faulty frame with more than 1518 bytes. Decimal depiction
Jitter Time variation of the signal edge. IP address 149.218.19.90
Kbps Kilobits per second, kbit/s. Net mask 255.255.255.0
L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol. For setting up a --> VPN tunnel on -> Subnetwork 149.218.19.0
Layer 2. --> IPsec. Available address range
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Node addresses 149.218.19.1 to 149.218.19.254
LAN Local Area Network. Local network, e.g. Ethernet, FDDI and token Broadcast address 149.218.19.255
ring. --> WLAN. NEXT Near End Cross Talk.
LAP Link Access Protocol. NIC Network Interface Card. Network interface in the computer.
Latency Time difference between the receipt and forwarding of data, gen- NMS Network management system.
erally between the last bit received and the first bit sent. Node Node in a data network (computer, printer, hub, switch, etc.), is
Skew Difference in propagation delays on various pairs, extremely impor- sometimes erroneously used with the meaning "hub" or "switch".
tant in full duplex parallel operation NRZ Non Return to Zero. Signal code. --> NRZI.
Propagation Delay Time that an electromagnetic signal requires for a par- NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert. Signal code. --> NRZ.
ticular transmission line, inverse of the signal velocity NVRAM Non-Volatile RAM. Non-volatile memory.
Link Aggregation Combination of several ports (maximum 4) into one vir- ODVA Open Device Vendor Association is an organisation that promotes
tual port. Parallel connection transmission with redundancy in case of fail- the worldwide use of DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP network technologies and
ure of a port. Standard IEEE 802.3. Colloquially also called "trunking". standards in industrial automation.
LLC Logical Link Control. Layer 2b. OID Object lD.
LSB Least Significant Bit. OLE Object Linking and Embedding is a technology for transmitting differ-
Fibre-optic cable Optical transmission medium ent data between devices.
LX Long Wavelength (Gbit Ethernet). OPC OLE for Process Control. Protocol in process automation for stan-
MAC Medium Access Control. MAC address, hardware address of a com- dardised data exchange between Windows applications.
ponent in the network. The MAC address is assigned by the manufacturer. OSI Open Systems Interconnection. International standardisation pro-
Address format: 6 bytes in hex code, separated by colons, e.g. gramme, originated by --> ISO and --> ITU-T, in order to create standards
00:80:63:01:A2:B3 for data networks to ensure the compatibility of devices from various man-
MAN Metropolitan Area Network. For connecting various --> LANs within a city. ufacturers.
Management Administration, configuration and monitoring of network OSI Model Model describing communication in a network. The functionali-
components. The management agent of the components being managed ty of the hardware is subdivided into 7 layers. In the lowest layer (physical
communicates with the management station (computer) via the manage- layer), adaptation to the medium is performed.
ment protocol SNMP OSPF Open Shortest Path First. Protocol for the exchange of routing infor-
MAU Medium Attachment Unit. --> Transceiver. mation between routers. Faster than --> RIP and suitable for larger net-
Mbps Megabits per second, Mbit/s works.
MD5 Message Digest 5. See also Hash Algorithm. OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer Versatile optical measuring
MDI Medium Dependent Interface. device for fibre-optic networks.
MDI-X MDI-Crossover, see also MDI. OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier. The first three bytes of the --> MAC
MIB Management Information Base. Contains the description of the address indicate the manufacturer of the components.
objects and functions connected in a network. Packet size Frame size. Ethernet: 64 ... 1518 bytes (1522 with VLAN tag,
MII Media Independent Interface. FDDI:... 4500 bytes.
Mini-GBIC Mini gigabit interface converter. --> SFP. PAP Password Authentication Protocol. PPP authentication method.
MLPPP Multi Link PPP. --> PPP. Passwords are transmitted in unencrypted form. PAP is based on user-
Modbus TCP, industrial Ethernet system based on the Modbus protocol names.
Modes - Propagation paths of the light in an optical fibre Parallel Detection Subfunction of -->autonegotiation, to adjust settings for
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching. Layer 3 protocol. a partner that does not support autonegotiation. A port detects the speed
MSB Most Significant Bit. based on FLP or NLP and sets itself to 100 Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s according-
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure. ly. HDX is always used as the duplex mode.
MTTR Max Time To Repair. PCF Plastic Cladding Silica Fiber. Plastic fibre with a core of fuse quartz.
Multicast Data packet directed to a group of devices, e.g. to all Lütze --> POF --> HCS®.
devices. PD Powered Device. Describes the end device (e.g. an IP telephone, in
Multimode fibres Optical fibres with relatively large core diameters. In the draft standard IEEE P802.3af (DTE Power via MDI). IEEE P802.3af
them, the light propagates over multiple paths - multiple modes. Typical defines how a power supply can be provided via an Ethernet twisted pair
core diameters are 100µm for step index fibres, for glass fibres, 200µm for cable.
PCS/HCS® fibres and 980 µm for POF fibres. Gradient index fibres are PDU Protocol Data Unit.
generally made of glass, and have a typical core diameter of 50 µm or PHY Physical sublayer. Physical layer/components (on Level 1 b).
62.5 µm. Conditionally through these --> Single mode fibre. PIMF Pair in Metal Foil (data cable). --> STP.
NAT Network Address Translation. PLC Programmable Logic Control. --> PLC - Programmable Logic Control.
NAT-T NAT Traversal. Normally --> IPsec does not function if there is a --> PMD Physical Medium Dependent. Physical layer/components on Level 1 a.
NAT Gateway between the two IPsec end points, because the IP address POE Power over Ethernet.
of the end point is also encrypted. This problem can be circumvented POF Polymer Optical Fiber. Plastic optical fibre --> HCS® --> PCF.
using NAT-T. If supported, NAT-T is switched on automatically if necessary POL Power over LAN.
when establishing a connection (handshake). Port Mirroring The data traffic of a port (In/Out) is mirrored (copied) on
NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface. Extended version of the another port, for example to allow it to be examined with an analyzer.
NetBIOS protocol, which is used by network software such as LAN Port Trunking --> Link Aggregation.
Manager, LAN Server, Windows for Workgroups and Windows NT. PowerLink Industrial Ethernet system from the company B&R
Net Mask The net mask marks all bits of an IP address that serve to iden-
tify the network and the subnetwork. --> IP address.
4.44
PLC Programmable Logic Controller. system for process control and visualisation. Windows-based
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol. Creates router-to-router and host-to-network Shielding attenuation Ratio between the power of electromagnetic inter-
connections. PPP works with protocols from various level, such as IP, IPX ference outside and inside of a shield. A measure of the effectiveness of
and ARA. PPP has integrated security mechanisms such as CHAP and the shielding, e.g. for cables or also connector housings.
RAR. Transfer impedance Current/voltage ratio on cable shields for assessing
PPPoE --> Point-to-Point-Protocol over Ethernet. the shielding effect.
PPS Packets Per Second. Data packets per second Suitability for drag chains: special cable designs have to be used for
PPTP Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol. operation in energy supply chains.
Prioritisation Data packets are given priority handling based on defined cri- Noise, broadband electromagnetic interference
teria. Identification on Layer 2 with inserted --> tag field, on Layer 3 in the SD Starting Delimiter.
--> TOS field of --> IP. SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. Is related to the American SONET
Private Key --> Private/Public Key: In asymmetrical encryption algorithms, (Synchronous Optical Network) standard; with a basic SDH rate of 155.52
two keys are used: one public one (public key) and one private one (pri- Mbit/s (STM-1) and multiples thereof.
vate key). The public key is made available by the future recipient of data SERCOS III, industrial Ethernet system based on the SERCOS interface
to those who will be sending the data to him. The private key is kept only SFD Start Frame Delimiter.
by the recipient. It is used to decrypt the received data. SFP Small form-factor pluggable. A --> transceiver for 1 Gbit/s_ networks
ProfiNet, industrial Ethernet system from Siemens that converts serial electric signals into optical signals and vice versa, see
PS Power Supply. --> PSU. also GBIC.
PSE Power Sourcing Equipment. Describes the device supplying power SHA-1 Secure Hash Algorithm 1. --> Hash.
(e.g. a switch) in the draft standard IEEE P802.3af (DTE Power via MDI). Single mode fibre Fibre-optic cable in which, due to its small core diame-
IEEE P802.3af defines how a power supply can be provided via an ter (max. 10 µm), the light can only propagate along one path starting with
Ethernet twisted pair cable. the cut-off wavelength. _ Multimode fibre
PSU Power Supply Unit. --> PS. SLA Service Level Agreement.
PTP Precision Time Protocol. Protocol for time synchronisation acc. to SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol. Standard protocol for serial point-to-
IEEE 1588, with a precision of less than 1µs. point connections, uses a serial interface (e.g. V24) for IP traffic.
Public Key --> Private/Public Key SMON Switch Monitoring.
PUR - Polyurethane, high-quality jacket material for cables SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Internet protocol that provides e-mail
PVC - Polyvinyl chloride, economical insulation and jacket material for services.
cables SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. Protocol for time synchronisation,
PVV Path Variability Value. Specified in bit times. based on NTP, with a precision of 1ms to 50ms. For higher precision,
QoS Quality of Service. Quality of the transmission, e.g. speed, band- --> PTP (Precision Time Protocol acc. to IEEE 1588) is used.
width, delay, reliability or priority. In Level 2 for IEEE 802.1D implemented SNAP Subnetwork Access Protocol.
only for priority. --> Prioritisation. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol standardised by
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. A RADIUS server IETF for communication between agents and the management station in
authenticates access for a client that logs on with its name and password. network management. Used in more than 99% of LANs.
Passwords are transmitted in encrypted form. SOHO Small Office Home Office. Networks for small offices/branches and
RAM Random Access Memory. Volatile memory telecommuting workstations.
RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. Supplies the statically Spanning Tree Protocol that automatically dissolves network loops. When
assigned IP address for an assigned MAC address. See also BOOTP and installed with switches, implements redundant paths for additional reliability
DHCP. if a connection fails. Change-over time 30 s to 60 s.
RAS Remote Access System. SQE Signal Quality Error. Signal that is sent back by a transceiver to the
Repeater Components for signal regeneration on Level 1. Regenerates LAN controller (processor) in order to report that the packet was sent prop-
the amplitude, signal edge and cycle. Repeaters with more than 2 ports erly. Also called heartbeat.
are also called hubs. SSH Secure Shell. Allows cryptographically secured communication over
RFC Request For Comments. Pseudo-standard for the Internet, protocols non-secure networks by means of authentication of the partners, and
and applications, issued by IETF. integrity and confidentiality of the data exchanged.
RG58 Coax cable with 50 characteristic impedance, also called ThinWire Star coupler Active star coupler --> Hub. A passive star coupler is a com-
or 10BASE2. ponent in fibre-optic equipment with n inputs and m outputs without ampli-
RIP Routing Information Protocol. For exchanging routing information fication of the signal.
between routers in a LAN. There are two versions: RIP V1 and RIP V2. Store & Forward Switching method in which a packet is first saved com-
--> OSPF. pletely and only then forwarded. --> Cut-Through
RJ45 Connector for twisted pair. Typical for --> Ethernet and --> ISDN. STP 1. Shielded Twisted Pair. Cable with shielded twisted wire pairs. -->
RMON Remote Monitoring. PIMF, UTP. 2. - Spanning Tree Protocol.
Router Components on Layer 3 of the - ISO/OSI Reference Model. Switch Component of Layer 2 of the OSI Reference Model. Synonym:
Connects networks on Layer 3. By means of additional paths to the desti- Bridge. Unlike a --> hub, forwards a packet only to the port to which the
nation, provides a choice of paths depending on de destination station is connected, which leads to switch disconnection of
RS 232 Recommended Standard. Serial interface, also designated V.24. individual segments. Then no access procedure is required between two
Strictly speaking, the supplement to V.24 according to à CCITT. switches in full duplex operation. So-called Layer-3 and Layer-4 switches
RSTP Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol. are now available that have also implemented sub-functions of these levels.
RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol. Reserves bandwidths in a àWAN Symmetry, Symmetrical attenuation Ratio between the power of the nor-
RTCP Realtime Transport Control Protocol. mal-mode wave and that of the common-mode wave as a measure of the
finable criteria, such as path costs. EMC properties of symmetrical copper cables (for shielded cables addi-
RTP Real Time Protocol. tionally --> shielding attenuation)
Return Loss Ratio of disruptive reflection to the transmitted signal power SX Short Wavelength (Gigabit Ethernet).
Rx Receive (received). Tag Field Optional field in the Ethernet packet, inserted after the so
SA Source Address TCO Total Cost of Ownership.
SAN Storage Area Network. Network for connecting servers and memory TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Connection-oriented transmission
subsystems, such as hard disks, RAID and tape systems. Generally protocol on Layer 4 of the TCP/IP protocol family. --> UDP.
based on Fibre Channel. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Most widely-used
SAP 1. Service Access Point. 2. Service Advertising Protocol. protocol family, from Layer 3 upwards. Standardised by --> IETF. Protocols
SC Straight Connector. Connector --> DSC. that build upon each other:
SCADA Supervision Control And Data Acquisition. Process visualisation Layer 3: IP; Layer 4: TCP, UDP; Layer 5: TFTP, SMTP, FTP, etc.
Layer 5 contains Layers 5 to 7 of the OSI model.
4.45
Telnet Virtual terminal program of the TCP/IP stack for remote access XML Extended Markup Language.
via network to the user interface of the serial interface. XNS Xerox Network Systems.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Protocol on Layer 5, uses --> UDP
for transfer, therefore used in --> LANs.
Token Ring Data network standardised in IEEE 802.5, but also pro-
prietary solutions by IBM.
TOS Type Of Service. Field in IP packet for --> Prioritisation.
TPE - Thermoplastic elastomers, a category of plastics with special
characteristics as an insulating and jacket material for cables
TP Twisted Pair. Symmetrical copper data cable.
Transceiver Converts data signals from AUI interfaces to another
medium, e.g. twisted pair. New components have transceivers already
implemented. For older components there are plug-on transceivers for
multimode, twisted pair or coax.
Trunking --> Aggregation.
TTL Time To Live. Field in the IP protocol header that specifies how
many hops are allowed for a packet before it is automatically deleted.
Tx Transmit. Transmission rate; speed of the transmission, also -->
Bandwidth, Ethernet: 10, 100, 1000, 10000Mbit/s
Token Ring: 4 Mbit/s, 16 Mbit/s
FDDI: 100 Mbit/s
UDP User Datagram Protocol. Connectionless transport protocol on
Layer 4 of the TCP/IP protocol family. --> TCP.
Unicast Data packet that is addressed to only one recipient, as
opposed to multicast and broadcast.
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply. --> USV
URL Universal Resource Locator. Standardised addressing scheme
for access to hypertext documents and other services via a browser.
Z.B. www.luetze.de
USV Uninterruptible power supply.
UTP Unshielded Twisted-Pair. Cable with unshielded twisted pairs of
wires, generally with 4 pairs. --> STP
VLAN Virtual LAN, set up with switches. Goal: Limiting broadcasts to
the network areas where the broadcast is useful. Is also used to sub-
divide networks for security reasons.
VPN Virtual Private Network A VPN joins a number of separate pri-
vate networks (subnetworks) into a common network via a public net-
work, e.g. the Internet. Confidentiality and authenticity is protected
through the use of cryptographic protocols. A VPN thus offers a cost-
effective alternative to dedicated lines when setting up a trans-region-
al company network.
VRRP Virtual Redundant Router Protocol. Protocol for controlling
redundant routers. See also HSRP.
WAN Wide Area Network Public data and transfer network for con-
necting local networks. Transmission protocols: ISDN, frame relay,
X.21 SDH, SONET, ATM.
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex.
WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is an encryption method in wire-
less LANs according to 802.11 for protecting the transmitted data.
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing. Method for processing the priority
queues in a switch. For example, the highest queue receives 50% of
the bandwidth, the next 25%, etc. .
WiFi Wireless Fidelity. WiFi is a certification for wireless LANs
(WLANs) according to standard 802.11, implemented by the WECA
(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). This certification confirms
the interoperability of WLAN products. --> http://www.wi-fi.net
Wireless LAN Local Networks, that operate without cable connec-
tions.
Wire-speed, forwarding of the data packets with line speed.
WLAN Wireless --> LAN. According to IEEE 802.11, .15, .16
(Bluetooth).
WWDM With the WWDM system (Wide Wavelength Division
Multiplex) it is possible to increase the transmission capacity of the
optical fibres in fibre-optic networks. To do this, the system multiplex-
es a number of single-mode optical signals of various wavelengths to
form a composite optical signal. In this manner several applications
can be transmitted at the same time over a single fibre-optic cable
pair. This means that it is not necessary to install additional fibre-optic
cables, thus significantly reducing costs.
WWW World Wide Web.
X.25 Data Packet Control Protocol, that is used in Datex-P, for
example.
4.46
Notes
4.47
5. Function Modules
LÜTZE Industrial Automation
Interface Modules, Passive

As an expert partner to industrial automation, Lütze offers standard
products and, in particular, custom solutions. Contents
Product Overview
Mounting modules
Diode modules
Display modules
Potentiometer modules
5.1
Interface Passive · Product Overview
Mounting Modules
Page 5.4
Diode Modules
Page 5.7
Page 5.6
Potentiometer Modules
Page 5.5
5.2
Interface Passive · Product Overview
5.3
Function module ·
Mounting module with soldering terminals for free component fitting of assembly parts
AC/DC 250 V, 4A

Screw terminal
Number of solder lugs 6 710620 MPE-3-0620 5
12 710626 MPE-6-0626 5
18 710828 MPE-9-0828 2
24 710663 MPE-12-0663 5
30 710664 MPE-15-0664 5
Technical data 6 12 18 24 30
Function type Subplate
Pin spacing 4.5 mm 5 mm
Rated current 4A
300 V
Dimensions 40178)
Pollution degree 2
General
Dimensions (w × h × d) 17.5 × 78.0 × 4 35.0 × 78.0 × 4 45.0 × 78.0 × 4 65.0 × 78.0 × 4 80.0 × 78.0 × 4
5.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm
Weight (kg/piece) 0.028 0.048 0.068 0.095 0.125
Approvals –
PIN assignment
710620, 710626, 710828
710663, 710664
5.4
Function module ·
Module for free component fitting of potentiometers

Verions in single, double or triple design
Screw terminal

Screw terminal
Number of potentiometer 1 716006 PTS-1-6006 5
2 710842 PTS-2-0842 2
3 710840 PTS-3-0840 2
Technical data 716006 710842 710840

Number of potentiometer 1 2 3
Function type Mounting Module
Diameter of mounting hole 10 mm 6.5 mm
Rated current 1A
300 V
40178)
PIN assignment Pollution degree 2
716006
General
Dimensions (w × h × d) 35.0 × 77.0 × 45.0 mm 90.0 × 77.0 × 55.0 mm 62.5 × 77.0 × 50.0 mm
Weight (kg/piece) 0.058 0.078 0.044
Approvals –
2
Termination Screw terminal 0.5–2.5 mm
710842
710840
5.5
Function module ·
Module fitted with freely switchable diodes

AC/DC 250 V, 1 A / 3 A
Screw terminal
Number of diodes 6 with 1 A 710665 DGE-6-1A/1600 V 5

12 with 1 A 710802 DGE-12-1 A/1600 V 2
12 with 3 A 710804 DGE-12-3A/1000 V 2
Technical data 710665 710802 710804

Function type Diode gate
Diameter of mounting hole – mm
Rated current (at UN) 1A 3A
300 V
50178)
Pollution degree 2
Dimensions Overvoltage category I
General
Weight (kg/piece) 0.042 0.088 0.096
Standards –
Approvals –
Termination Screw terminal 0.5–2.5 mm2
Accessories Colour Article number Description PU
PIN assignment
5.6
Function module ·
Diode module with common reference point

common cathode / anode
Screw terminal
Number of diodes 22, common anode 710812 DGE-22M-0812 2

Function type Diode gate
Diameter of mounting hole – mm
Rated current (at UN) 1A
300 V
50178)
Pollution degree 2
General
Dimensions Housing material PPE
Standards –
Approvals –
Termination Screw terminal 0.5–2.5 mm2
PIN assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5.7
Function module ·
Lamp test module for 11 lamps

Integrated diode gate
Screw terminal
Number of diodes 22 710814 LPE-11-0814 2

Function type Lamp test gate
Diameter of mounting hole 3 mm
Rated current (at UN) 1A
300 V
50178)
Pollution degree 2
General
Dimensions Housing material PPE
Standards –
Approvals –
Termination Screw terminal:
single-wire up to 4 mm2
PIN assignment fine-strand up to 2.5 mm2
5.8
Notes
5.9
Article number index
dex
Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page
104243 4.22 722759 3.24 730801 1.65 751528 2.30 760828 1.37 768003 1.36
104245 4.23 722761 3.13 730841 1.64 751529 2.31 760921 1.38 768005 1.36
104246 4.23 722762 3.14 730842 1.68 751530 2.15 760922 1.38 768006 1.36
104247 4.22 722763 3.16 730854 1.70 751531 2.15 760926 1.38 768007 1.36
104301 4.22 722764 3.18 730855 1.70 751532 2.15 760927 1.38 770040 1.29
104303 4.23 722766 3.13 731737 1.68 751533 2.16 761022 1.42 770041 1.29
104304 4.23 722767 3.15 731854 1.70 751534 2.16 761026 1.42 770046 1.29
104307 4.22 722768 3.16 731855 1.70 751535 2.16 761027 1.42 770047 1.30
104310 4.23 722769 3.20 731883 1.66 751536 2.17 761042 1.57 770050 1.30
104311 4.22 722770 3.22 750320 2.39 751537 2.17 761101 1.48 770051 1.30
104313 4.22 722773 3.13 750321 2.43 751538 2.17 761102 1.46 770056 1.30
104326 4.23 722774 3.15 750322 2.44 751539 2.18 761103 1.47 770100 1.23
104327 4.22 722775 3.16 750340 2.40 751540 2.19 761105 1.56 770101 1.23
104335 4.22 722776 3.20 750360 2.41 751541 2.19 761107 1.54 770106 1.23
104336 4.22 722777 3.22 750370 2.42 751542 2.19 761120 1.52 770110 1.23
104337 4.23 722778 3.24 750510 2.32 751809 2.21 761222 1.43 770111 1.23
104338 4.22 722779 3.26 750517 2.33 751816 2.35 761307 1.44 770116 1.23
104339 4.22 722781 3.24 750524 2.38 751817 2.35 761311 1.41 770117 1.23
104347 4.23 722782 3.26 750526 2.30 751819 2.22 761312 1.39 770140 1.27
490105 4.34 722783 3.35 750527 2.31 751829 2.24 761313 1.39 770141 1.27
490106 4.34 722784 3.35 750528 2.30 751833 2.26 761320 1.52 770146 1.27
490107 4.34 722785 3.37 750529 2.31 751839 2.27 761321 1.52 770150 1.28
490108 4.34 722786 3.37 750530 2.15 751847 2.36 761322 1.52 770151 1.28
491075 4.33 722787 3.33 750531 2.15 751848 2.37 761323 1.52 770156 1.28
492075 4.33 722789 3.34 750532 2.15 751855 2.23 761340 1.52 770157 1.28
710620 5.4 722790 3.32 750533 2.16 751869 2.29 761341 1.53 770240 1.29
710626 5.4 722794 3.46 750534 2.16 751873 2.28 761350 1.53 770241 1.29
710663 5.4 722800 3.40 750535 2.16 751927 2.20 761691 1.40 770246 1.29
710664 5.4 722802 3.41 750536 2.17 751931 2.34 761692 1.39 770400 1.26
710665 5.6 722803 3.23 750537 2.17 760020 1.42 761693 1.39 770401 1.26
710755 1.73 722804 3.25 750538 2.17 760022 1.42 761708 1.56 770406 1.26
710802 5.6 722805 3.27 750539 2.18 760026 1.42 761821 1.37 770410 1.26
710804 5.6 722806 3.28 750540 2.19 760027 1.42 761822 1.37 770411 1.26
710812 5.7 722807 3.41 750541 2.19 760042 1.57 761826 1.37 770416 1.26
710814 5.8 722808 3.25 750542 2.19 760101 1.48 761827 1.37 770417 1.26
710820 3.65 722809 3.27 750557 2.12 760102 1.46 761828 1.37 770420 1.26
710828 5.4 722810 3.28 750558 2.12 760103 1.47 761921 1.38 770421 1.26
710840 5.5 722811 3.42 750559 2.13 760105 1.56 761922 1.38 770426 1.26
710842 5.5 722812 3.42 750809 2.21 760107 1.54 761926 1.38 770440 1.32
711755 1.73 722813 3.42 750816 2.35 760120 1.52 761927 1.38 770441 1.32
716006 5.5 722814 3.44 750817 2.35 760222 1.43 762056 1.50 770446 1.32
716123 3.65 722816 3.44 750819 2.22 760226 1.43 762082 1.45 770450 1.33
716400 3.50 722986 3.39 750829 2.24 760227 1.43 762083 1.49 770451 1.33
716401 3.50 722987 3.29 750833 2.26 760307 1.44 762084 3.66 770456 1.33
716401.0050 3.50 722989 3.39 750839 2.27 760311 1.41 762184 3.66 770457 1.33
716403 3.51 722995 3.36 750847 2.36 760312 1.39 762185 3.66 770460 1.32
716404 3.52 722996 3.38 750848 2.37 760313 1.39 762186 3.66 770461 1.32
716410 3.53 722999 3.43 750855 2.23 760320 1.52 762189 1.59 770466 1.32
716410.0050 3.53 728753 3.17 750869 2.29 760321 1.52 762190 1.59 770500 1.25
716420 3.63 728754 3.19 750873 2.28 760322 1.52 762192 1.59 770501 1.25
716421 3.62 728758 3.22 750901 2.14 760323 1.52 762193 1.59 770506 1.25
716425 3.59 728761 3.12 750919 2.25 760340 1.52 762302 1.51 770540 1.31
716435 3.60 728762 3.14 750927 2.20 760341 1.53 762303 1.51 770541 1.31
716436 3.61 728763 3.17 750931 2.34 760350 1.53 762306 1.51 770546 1.31
716437 3.64 728764 3.18 751320 2.39 760691 1.40 762307 1.51 770900 1.21
716456 3.58 728766 3.12 751321 2.43 760692 1.39 762312 1.51 770903 1.21
716457 3.56 728768 3.17 751322 2.44 760693 1.39 762313 1.51 770905 1.21
716458 3.57 728769 3.19 751340 2.40 760708 1.56 762316 1.51 770911 1.22
716459 3.55 728775 3.17 751360 2.41 760751 1.60 762317 1.51 770913 1.22
722751 3.13 728776 3.19 751370 2.42 760752 1.58 762320 1.51 770916 1.22
722752 3.15 730711 1.64 751510 2.32 760753 1.58 762321 1.51 770917 1.22
722753 3.16 730717 1.64 751517 2.33 760821 1.37 762401 1.55 770918 1.24
722754 3.20 730732 1.68 751524 2.38 760822 1.37 762411 1.55 770919 1.24
722757 3.21 730741 1.69 751526 2.30 760826 1.37 768001 1.36 770920 1.24
722758 3.22 730753 1.67 751527 2.31 760827 1.37 768002 1.36 770921 1.24
6.0
Article number index
de
Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page Part-No. Page
770922 1.24
770923 1.24
770924 1.24
770926 1.24
770928 1.24
770930 1.24
772000 4.10
772001 4.10
772002 4.12
772003 4.12
772005 4.15
772007 4.15
772010 4.11
772011 4.11
772012 4.13
772014 4.14
772020 4.16
772021 4.16
772022 4.17
772030 4.19
772031 4.19
772032 4.18
772033 4.18
772100 4.29
772101 4.29
772102 4.29
772104 4.31
772106 4.32
772120 4.30
772121 4.30
772122 4.35
772123 4.35
772124 4.36
772125.xxxx 4.25
772126.xxxx 4.26
772127 4.37
772129 4.41
772130 4.38
772131 4.38
772132 4.38
772133 4.39
772134 4.39
772135 4.39
772136.0100 4.27
772136.0200 4.27
772136.0500 4.27
772137 4.40
772141.0100 4.24
772141.0200 4.24
772141.0500 4.24
6.1
Certificates
Copyright
Protected trademarks and trade names are not always labelled as such in this publica-
tion. This does not mean they are free names as defined in the trademark and brand
mark law. Publication does not imply that the descriptions or pictures used are free from
rights of third parties. The information is published without regard to possible patent
protection. Trade names are used without any guarantee that they can be used freely.
In putting together text, pictures and data, we proceeded with the greatest care. Despite
this, the possibility of errors cannot be completely excluded. We therefore reject any
legal responsibility or liability. We are, of course, grateful for any recommendations for
improvement or information useful for making corrections or establishing the truth. But
the author does not assume any responsibility for the content of these documents.
Germany
Friedrich Lütze GmbH
Postfach 12 24 (PLZ 71366)
Bruckwiesenstrasse 17-19
D-71384 Weinstadt
Tel.: + 49 7151 6053-0
Fax: + 49 7151 6053-277(-288)
info@luetze.de
Cables and Cords United Kingdom

LÜTZE Ltd.
10.2013.P2EC01.D.3.750.D2500.UK300.USA500.03.33 • © by Friedrich Lütze GmbH, Weinstadt, Deutschland • Printed in Germany. Subject to technical modification.
Cable assemblies Unit 3 Sandy Hill Park
Sandy Way, Amington
Cable fittings Tamworth, Staffs, B77 4DU
Tel.: + 44 1827 31333-0
Cable conduits Fax: + 44 1827 31333-2
sales.gb@lutze.co.uk
LSC-Wiring-System
USA
Module- and LUTZE INC.
Interface Technology 13330 South Ridge Drive
Charlotte, NC 28273
Ethernet Connectivity Tel.: +1 704 504-0222
Fax: +1 704 504-0223
Suppression Technology info@lutze.com
Power Supplies Austria

LÜTZE Elektrotechnische
Railway-Technology Erzeugnisse Ges.m.b.H.
office@luetze.at
Switzerland
LÜTZE AG
info@luetze.ch
France
LUTZE SAS
lutze@lutze.fr
Spain
LUTZE, S.L.
info@lutze.es
China
Luetze Trading (Shanghai) Co.Ltd.
info@luetze.cn
www.luetze.com

Lutze Switch Power

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Lutze Switch Power

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Automation Solutions

We have been developing and manufacturing electro-

Our basic concept as system suppliers, providing a

The close relationship between product development

Lutze systems comply with the highest industrial stan-

Our four product groups include components and

Take a look at LUTZE,

The future is blue

Goods with real value

Chapter 1: Interface Technology Switchgear 1.0

Chapter 2: Signal Isolation Converters 2.0

Chapter 3: Supply and Safety 3.0

Chapter 5: Function Modules 5.0

Take a look at LUTZE,

LÜTZE know-how at a glance

Energy-efficient and space-saving

Intelligent and reliable monitoring of DC 24V circuits

• Remote ON/OFF and manual ON/OFF

Connecting, converting, monitoring

For monitoring applications, LÜTZE

Plug & Play in Industrial Ethernet

LÜTZE provides category 6

Cables – a lot depends on them

Relays and Solid State Relays

Relay socket Relay socket Accessories Fully assembled Fully assembled

Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays

Relays Relays Relays Relays

Page 1.64 Page 1.67 Page 1.68 Page 1.69

The maximum continuous current is the

Relay characteristic data

1. Insulation resistance 3. Surge voltage resistance

The insulation resistance is measured Capacity of the relay to resist an external

Mechanical properties and service life

5. Maximum switching frequency

Methods for selecting the correct relay

Methods for selecting the correct relay

Rules Product selection

Switching time a) Switching time

Precautions at the relay coil input

In correct application, the relays must be

5. Phase synchronisation when switching AC loads

6. False switching due to inductive coupling

8. Rare switching operations

Precautions on the contact

Properties of commonly used contact materials

Ag The electrical and thermal conductivity of silver is Universally usable under ≥ 12 V

Contact surface Typical properties Typical Guide values for

When switching inductive loads with a relay, such as in relay

• Contact protection circuit

ing. The resistor limits the current on the

Using the constant voltage properties of the

voltages over the contacts. This circuit also

• Avoid using the protective circuits shown in

• Mounting the protective device

• Anomalous corrosion during high-frequency switching of DC loads (sparking)

Precautions when switching inductive loads

• Switching of load and contacts

a) Good example b) Bad example

• Avoidance of short-circuits between working and normally-open contacts

1) R1, R2: Relay contacts 2) 3) R1, R2: Relay contacts

• Short-circuits between contact sets

• Load type and starting current

• When using long cables

• Service life at high temperatures